JP7264438B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, the first starting area is the main starting area (main area) where the game ball is recommended to enter, and the second starting area is the secondary starting area (secondary area). ), and a second game state (for example, a right-handed state) in which the second start region becomes the main start region where the entry of the game ball is recommended, and the first start region becomes the secondary start region. Gaming machines exist (for example, Patent Literature 1).

JP 2017-148127 A

By the way, there is room for improving interest in the variable display game .

An object of the present invention is to improve the interest in games.

According to one representative aspect of the present invention, an effect control means capable of displaying a variable display game on a display device is provided based on the entry of a game ball into the first start area or the second start area , and the variable display game is provided. A first advantageous state advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the variable display game is the first special result, and the first advantageous state is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is the second special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state , a first game state in which entry of a game ball into the first starting area is recommended, and a game ball entering the second starting area. a second game state in which entry of a ball is recommended ; a first variable display game can be executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first start area; A second variable display game can be executed based on the entry of a game ball into the area, and the effect control means can display the display regardless of whether the first variable display game or the second variable display game is executed. A decoration special figure variation display game can be displayed on the device, and when one of the first variation display game and the second variation display game is stopped and the other variation display game is started , From the stop mode of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the one variation display game, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the other variation display game can be started, and the first start area and Blessing effect for congratulating the occurrence of the second advantageous state when the variable display game executed based on the ball entering the recommended starting area among the second starting areas results in the second special result. can be executed, and when the variable display game executed based on the ball entering the starting area where the ball is not recommended to enter out of the first starting area and the second starting area results in the second special result, It is possible to execute a blessing effect for blessing the occurrence of the second advantageous state .

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to one form of this invention, the interest of a game can be improved .

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the various display parts of a package display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the special figure 1 indicator. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the special figure 2 indicator. It is another figure which shows the lighting mode of the special figure 2 indicator. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of game control. 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of checksum calculation processing; 9 is a flow chart showing a procedure of initial value random number update processing; 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of input processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a procedure of switch reading processing; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of output processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of payout command transmission processing; FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of random number update processing 1; 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of random number update processing 2; It is a flow chart showing the procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of fraud & prize-winning monitoring processing. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of winning number counter update processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of effect command setting processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a time chart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is another time chart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is still another time chart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of payout busy signal check processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of hard random number acquisition processing; It is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure starting port 1 switch processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 1 normal processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a table exemplifying a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a losing probability. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of sorting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of high-probability variation count update processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting process 2 during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the process during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the process during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the processing during special figure 2 display. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a fanfare/interval process transition setting process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing in special-figure 1 small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing in special-figure 2 small hit fanfare. 7 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare/interval processing. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing transition setting processing 1 during opening of the big winning opening. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot operation|movement transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning a prize hole residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot end process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing in small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small-hit residual ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of design variation control processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of segment LED editing processing; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of board radio wave fraud monitoring processing; 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing; 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of start port 1 signal editing processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of design determination frequency|count signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of Toku-figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the first half of single-shot command processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the second half of single-shot command processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation interruption setting process. 9 is a flowchart showing variable restart setting processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a fluctuation|variation interruption setting process. 9 is a flowchart showing variable restart setting processing; 4 is a time chart (timing chart) showing how the variable display game is forcibly terminated. 4 is a time chart showing how a variable display game is interrupted/restarted; (a) It is a time chart showing a case where the variable time timer of the special figure 2 variable display game is updated when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. (b) is a time chart showing a case of not updating. (a) It is a time chart showing how the delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not set. (b) It is a time chart showing how to set a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the special figure 2 variable display game. (a) It is a time chart showing how the delay timer (wait time) of the special figure 2 variation display game is set regardless of the state of the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game. (b) It is a time chart showing how the delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not set. It is a time chart showing the processing when there is a possibility that the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game end at the same timing. 10 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs while the variable display game is suspended and the power failure is restored (power is turned on). 10 is a time chart showing another example of processing when a power failure occurs while the variable display game is suspended and the power failure is restored (power is turned on). It is a front view of a game board provided in the game machine in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the lamp display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the batch display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the various display parts which comprise the batch display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment; It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. It is a table illustrating the big hit probability, small hit probability, loss probability, probability variation probability in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of high probability variation count update processing in the second embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of time saving fluctuation frequency update processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is the 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing in the second embodiment. It is the 1st flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 1st flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric prize-winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process during a normal figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the process during normal per figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric remaining bulb processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of end processing per normal figure. It is a time chart of the operation of the first special variable winning device in the small hit RUSH. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. In the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying whether or not there is a small win effect and a big win effect for winning in the main variation display game or the secondary variation display game with respect to the normal game state (left-handed state). In the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying whether or not there is a small winning effect and a big winning effect for winning in the main variation display game or the secondary variation display game with respect to the small winning RUSH state (right hitting state). It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 usual processing according to the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process according to the third embodiment; FIG. In the third embodiment, it is an example of a screen transition diagram (first half) showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is a diagram showing a case where a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur in the normal game state. In the third embodiment, it is an example of a screen transition diagram (second half) showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is a diagram showing a case where a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur in the normal game state. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows another example 1 of an irregular small hit. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the example 2 of another irregular small hit. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows another example 3 (switching production|presentation 1) of an irregular small hit. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows another example 4 (switching production|presentation 2) of an irregular small hit. Regarding the third embodiment, it is an example of a screen transition diagram (first half) showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. It is a figure which shows the case where it generate|occur|produces. Regarding the third embodiment, it is an example of a screen transition diagram (second half) showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. It is a figure which shows the case where it generate|occur|produces. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing concerning the modification of a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table illustrating whether or not there is a small win effect and a big win effect for a win in a main variation display game or a sub-variation display game in a normal game state (left-handed state) in a modification of the third embodiment; FIG. In the modified example of the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying whether or not there is a small hit effect and a big win effect for a hit in the main variation display game or the sub-variation display game with respect to the small win RUSH state (right-handed state). FIG. 11 is an example of a screen transition diagram (first half) showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in a modification of the third embodiment; FIG.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[First embodiment]
[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to an island facility via a hinge so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 1 capable of emitting light according to the game state are provided.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs therein, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes a performance device that performs lighting effects and the like in accordance with the progress of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The illumination member disposed inside also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball shooting device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a performance operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light-emitting performance or the like according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operating device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. Also, the special game state is, for example, a specific game state (time saving state) or a special result (
For example, there are a state with a high probability of occurrence of a big hit (probability variable state, probability variable state), a big hit state (special game state), and a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variable state continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and a predetermined probability fall lottery. There are things that continue until you win (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate the probability variable state may be always generated when the big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the probability variable state by the big hit pattern random number, or a prize winning device having a specific area may be provided and specified. A variable probability state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball rental operation device includes a ball rental button 27 and a return button 28.
, and a balance display unit 26 . A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player. The balance display portion 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

Beneath the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball shooting device (not shown) and a game ball capable of being stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24 , the ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device has a momentum (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area.
can be changed according to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be shot in various shooting modes with different shooting momentum. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 is arranged below the upper tray unit with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0a. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the . The gaming machine 10
A game is played by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31. - 特許庁In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game. At the rear of the window formed in the center case 40, there is an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is equipped with a game ball flowing down the game area 32 .
A warp path 40a for guiding the game ball to the inside and a stage part 40b on which the game ball that has passed through the warp path 40a can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the first start prize winning port 36 and the second start prize winning port 37, the stage portion 40
The game ball rolled on b is likely to enter the first starting prize winning port 36 or the second starting prize winning port 37. - 特許庁

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 8) and the board rendering device 44 (see FIG. 8).

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls to these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 7).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, the first start winning prize area (first start winning area, special figure 1 start opening, start opening 1) 36 that provides the start condition (start condition) of the special figure fluctuation display game is provided. At the time of left-handed hitting (normal hitting), it becomes easier for the game ball to win (enter) the first starting prize-winning port 36.例文帳に追加In the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40, a second starting winning opening (second starting winning area, special figure 2 starting opening, starting opening 2) 37 is provided. At the time of right-handed hitting, the game ball becomes easy to win (enter) the second starting prize-winning port 37.例文帳に追加The game ball is the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 3
When winning 7, a special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

In the game area 32 below the second starting winning opening 37, there is an attacker type opening the lower winning opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the lower winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7). A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state in which the large winning port is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize balls) is awarded to the player. A lower special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 7) is arranged in the lower special winning opening as detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

In addition, in the game area 32 on the upper left of the center case 40, an upper grand prize winning opening solenoid 39b
A second special variable prize winning device 39 (special electric accessory) having an attacker type opening and closing door 39c that opens the upper big prize opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side by (see FIG. 7) is provided. ing. The second special variable winning device 39, like the first special variable winning device 38, is in a state in which the big winning opening is closed according to the result of the special figure variable display game (blocked state disadvantageous to the player).
By changing from the state to an open state (a game state advantageous to the player) and facilitating the inflow of game balls into the upper grand prize opening, a predetermined game value (prize balls) is given to the player. ing. In addition, in the upper special winning opening, an upper special winning opening switch 39a (see FIG. 7) (two switches in this embodiment) is arranged as detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

General winning port 35, first starting winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, first special variable winning device 3
When the game ball wins the lower big winning hole of 8 and the upper big winning hole of the second special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) receives the number of prizes according to the type of the winning winning hole The ball is discharged from the payout device to the upper tray 21. - 特許庁In addition, in the game area 32 below the first special variable prize winning device 38, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that do not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game (special figure 1 game), a special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 game)
) is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display sections D1 to D20 for displaying information such as the current game state (see FIG. 3).

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. The collective display device 50 is a first special figure variable display unit 51 for variable display games, which is composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like.
It has (special figure 1 indicator) (lamp D1) and second special figure variation display section 52 (special figure 2 indicator) (lamp D2). In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display portion 53 (lamps D3 to D7) that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of openings and closings of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) and the occurrence of the small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display. Memory display unit 54 (
It has a special figure 1 pending display) (lamps D11-D14).

Furthermore, in the collective display device 50, the first game state display portion 55 (first game state display device, probability state display portion) (lamp D15-
D18), a second game state display unit 56 (second game state display) (lamps D8-D10) that lights up when a big win or a small win occurs to notify that it is right-handed (when right-handed). is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 displays a third game state display unit 57 (third
It may have a game state display, an interruption state display section) (lamps D19, D20).

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing lighting states of various display units 53 to 57 (lamps D3 to D20) constituting the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. The collective display device 50 displays the states of the gaming machine corresponding to the lighting modes of the various display units 53-57. The round display section 53 (lamps D3-D7) lights up according to the number of rounds, and the memory display section 54 (lamps D11-D14) lights up according to the number of reservations (starting memory number). The first gaming state display portion 55 (lamps D15-D18) lights up in a high probability state and goes out in a low probability state, the second gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) lights up when hitting right, Turns off when hitting left (normal hitting).

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the special figure variation display game will be described.
In addition, in the present embodiment, a normal pattern start gate is not provided, and a so-called normal pattern variation display game is not executed. A movable member for opening and closing the second start winning opening 37 is not provided in the second starting winning opening 37 .

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters the general prize winning opening 3.
5. Win the first start prize winning port 36, the second start prize winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or go to the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 It flows in and is discharged from the game area 32 . Then, when the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of the winning winning port The corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper tray 21 through the payout device.

As a basic game method, in the normal game state, the player hits left and wins the game ball in the first start winning port 36 to start the special figure 1 variable display game, small hit / big hit, probability variable state, etc. is generated, the player switches to right-handed hitting and aims at the second start winning opening 37 or the big winning opening. The display device 41 can display an instruction indicating whether the player should hit left or right.
, 19b can signal an error.

Winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and winning to the second starting winning opening 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 7) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7). The game ball that has won the first start winning hole 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), and the second start winning hole The game ball that has won 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (1 in this embodiment).

At the time of detection of the starting winning ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big win pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory (special figure start memory) for each predetermined number of times (for example, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the maximum 4 times) is stored. The number of memories of the special figure 1 start winning memory (special figure 1 starting memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41 Is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described later, the special figure 2 variation display game can be simultaneously executed (running) independently of the special figure 1 variation display game, and further, the special figure 2 variation The special figure 2 starting prize during execution of the display game or during the big hit is invalidated (detection of the starting port 2 switch 37a is invalidated). Therefore, the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 starting memory) does not accumulate substantially, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts as soon as the special figure 2 starting winning memory is generated. That is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not performed at the timing when the game ball wins the second start winning port 37, the variation start condition (start condition) of the special figure 2 variation display game
holds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 start winning memory number is configured not to be displayed on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41 . In addition, it is also possible to display the special figure 2 start winning memory number on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) on the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) on the special figure 2 indicator 52 based on the winning to the second start winning opening 37 or the second start memory. do.

In the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the identification information (special symbol 1 (special figure 1), special symbol 2 (special figure 2)) in the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 is variably displayed, and then a predetermined result mode is stopped.

In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be put into a running state at the same time (both) independently of each other. When it occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed stopped), the other special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result.

When the game ball wins in the second start winning port 37 by hitting to the right in the normal game state,
Special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts fluctuation, but basically long fluctuation (long fluctuation, for example 10 minutes)
is performed, a big hit or a small hit that occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this time will force the game to be lost and stopped.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of a 7-segment type indicator (lamp D1) that constitutes the special figure 1 indicator 51. As shown in FIG. The special figure 1 variable display game is executed by a variable display that repeats lighting and extinguishing of the identification information (here, the central segment and the dot part) on the special figure 1 indicator 51. The stop display of the loss result of the special figure 1 variable display game (loss pattern, loss display) is a display in which the central segment and the dot part are lit. Special figure 1 fluctuation display stop display of the game jackpot result (
The jackpot pattern, jackpot display) can have a plurality of displays (symbols) corresponding to the number of rounds (R) of the jackpot and the game state (normal state or variable probability state) after the jackpot ends. There are multiple types of stop display (small winning pattern, small winning display) of the small winning result of the special figure 1 variable display game, but the opening pattern (opening time, etc.) of the big winning opening due to the small winning is the same one type ( It is only a special figure 1 small hit).

In addition, in this embodiment, in all types of jackpots, the probability variation state is a predetermined number of times after the jackpot ends (
This is continued until the variable display game is executed 50 times, for example. In other words, the gaming machine is an ST (special time) machine, and the big hit symbols are only probability variable symbols.

6A and 6B show a 7-segment display (lamp D1
) is a diagram showing a lighting mode. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed by a variable display that repeats lighting and extinguishing of the identification information (here, the central segment and the dot part) on the special figure 2 indicator 52. The stop display of the loss result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (loss pattern, loss display) is
The central segment is the illuminated display. The stop display of the jackpot result of the special figure 2 variable display game (jackpot pattern, jackpot display) is the number of rounds (R) of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot (
There can be a plurality of displays (symbols) corresponding to the normal state or the variable probability state). There are multiple types of stop display (small hit pattern, small win display) of the small hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game,
There are 3 types of opening patterns (opening time, etc.)
). In addition, in the special figure 2 small prizes 1, 2 and 3, the big winning opening (upper big winning opening or lower big winning opening) to be opened may be different, and depending on the small winning pattern, the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening Either of them will be opened in a predetermined opening pattern.

Also, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

The decoration special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of characters to enhance interest.

When the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), a special figure fluctuation display game As a result, a special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols, and a big win state (special game state) is entered. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 and/or the second special variable winning device 39 are activated by energizing the lower large winning opening solenoid (38b) and/or the upper large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 7). , the big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds or several tens of seconds). That is, the large winning openings provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are opened wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, during which time the player can win many game balls. A privilege that can be acquired is given.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), special figure fluctuation display As a result of the game, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and a small win state is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used for the determination of the jackpot, but the jackpot value (jackpot determination value)
is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

In this case, the first special variable prize winning device 38 and/or the second special variable prize winning device 39 energize the lower special prize winning solenoid 38b and/or the upper special prize winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7) to activate the special prize winning opening. is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 2 seconds or less).

Here, the difference between the big win and the small win will be explained.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). Variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38 and / or second
This means that a specific flag is set to continuously operate the special variable winning device 39). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. is released.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are configured as separate indicators, and each special figure variation display game may take a running state (running state) at the same time, but on the other hand If a big hit or a small hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed stopped), the other special figure fluctuation display game being executed is forced to lose. Stop.

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. Also, the decoration special figure variation display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may both be in an execution state (running state) at the same time, but one of the decoration special figure variation display games (a special result or a specific result is derived and stop-displayed), the other decorative special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch (38a, 39a) uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil, which is equipped with a magnetic detection coil. It is In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0, the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls the game, and is a CP having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111
It comprises a U section 110, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for the random number generation circuit, and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting the .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate substrate or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112 . When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the game microcomputer 1
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in 11 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b stores non-volatile information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111c is a work area for the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. used as ROM 111b or RAM 11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-reach state includes multiple ready-to-reach effects, and the system of ready-to-reach effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values) includes normal reach (N reach) and special 1 reach (SP1 reach). , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device, and output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. A random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining pattern random numbers and variation patterns in special figure variation display games (including the execution time of variation display games in various reach and non-reach variation displays) and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111a based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. .

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 11
1a constitutes variation distribution information acquiring means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start prize winning port 36, and a The starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning port switch 3 of the second special variable winning device 39
9a and supplied from these switches with a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as V and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, the proximity I/F1
21, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower special winning port switch 38a and the upper special winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124.

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Signals from a switch 63 and a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12 or the like are inputted. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The overflow switch signal and the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 are taken in, and the data bus 1
A first input port 122 is provided for supplying to the gaming microcomputer 111 via 40 .
The frame radio wave irregularity signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to receive commands. is a signal. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full).

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power outage monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and an initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are transmitted via the data bus 140 to the gaming microcomputer 1.
11. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST noise-removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111, and the output section 13
0 to each port. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is applied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing test apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (lower grand prize opening solenoid) 38b that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the first special variable prize winning device 38, and a solenoid (upper grand prize opening solenoid) that opens the second special variable prize winning device 39. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open/close data of the solenoid 39b.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signal of the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and a fourth driver 138c for outputting an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to an external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the collective display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. A fourth terminal for outputting an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
Driver 138d is supplied with 12V DC to provide a 12V level to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 8
2 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program executed by the CPU (production control program)
A program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, a FeRAM 323 that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied at the time of a power failure, the current date and time (year, month, day and day of the week) , time, etc.) is connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111 , determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video,
It performs processing such as instructing playback sound to, lighting decorative lamps, driving control of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which voice data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Command I/F3
Via 31, received decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from game control device 100 to production control device 300 as production control command signal (production command). . The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built into the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor inside the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . In addition, DC-
A DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.

A start winning prize (start memory) is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from a start port 1 switch 36a provided in a first start prize winning port 36, and a special figure 1 variation display game jackpot determination is made based on the start memory. The random number is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the special figure 1
A hit/loss of a variable display game is determined.

In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning prize port 37. The numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variable display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37). make a means

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and displays the special game state (jackpot). state). In the process of generating a special game state, C
For example, the PU 111a opens the opening/closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 with the large winning opening solenoid 38b, or opens the movable member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 with the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and enters the large winning opening. control to enable the inflow of game balls.

Then, it is determined whether a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or whether a predetermined openable time (for example, about 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. One round is to open the big winning mouth until one of the conditions is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game )I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the high probability state, the probability of a hit result (jackpot result in this embodiment) in the special figure fluctuation display game is normal probability state (
It is a high state compared to the low probability state). Also, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) High probability state and Even if it becomes, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed so that the variation time of the special figure variation display game is shortened. In this embodiment, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are configured to occur at the same time.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 includes main processing mainly shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, and control processing shown in FIG.
2 and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. That is, the game control program corresponding to the control process of the game microcomputer 111 is a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main process.
and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to timer interrupt processing.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. 9A and 9B are flowcharts showing procedures of main processing (main program) executed by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****" or "S****".

As shown in FIG. 9A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to the prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (A1007).
By setting a predetermined initial value in the power-on delay timer, sub-control means (for example, payout control device 20
0 and effect control device 300) waiting time for waiting until the program starts normally (
For example, 3 seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the initialization switch 11
2 operation can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. I have to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

When the power-on delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of timing the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus and checks the number of times (
For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1
009).

Game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is "Y
'), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal has been kept on for the number of checks set in step A1008 (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to step A1009 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is "
N"), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008 for setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal.

Also, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015 ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on based on the previously read state of the first input port 122 (A1016).

The game control device 100, when the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is "
N"), and it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). Then, if normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), R
It is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in WM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the blackout inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is "Y"), executes the checksum calculation process of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). , determines whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power failure (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "
Y"), the process proceeds to step A1021 in FIG. 9B, and the process in the case of normal restoration (recovery) from the power failure is executed.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the initialization switch is on (the result of A1016 is "Y"), when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (A1
017 result is "N" or A1018 result is "N"), and if the checksum is not normal (A1020 result is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1023 in FIG. 9B for initialization. Execute the process. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. form.

The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A10
21). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. A busy signal status area (payout busy signal flag area) for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is cleared. It is in an undefined state indicating that it has not been determined.

And the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (A1022), and the process of step A1028 is executed. Commands at the time of power failure recovery include a model designation command that indicates the type of game machine, a decoration special 1 reservation number command that indicates the number of special 1 reservations, a probability information command that indicates the probability state, and a screen designation command. .
The command for specifying the screen is a command for specifying the display contents of the display device 41. For example, when both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are in normal processing (when neither variation nor hit operation is in progress) is the command for the customer waiting demo, otherwise it is the command for the recovery screen.

In addition, as a command at the time of power failure recovery, special figure 1
If the fluctuation display game or the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted (if there is a special figure game interruption flag backed up in RWM), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted or the special figure 2 Interruption command (interruption instruction) indicating that the variable display game is interrupted
may be included.

On the other hand, when executing the processing of step A1023 after executing steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibition area to access permission (A1023). Furthermore, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1024), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1025).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1026). The area to be initialized is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command for RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and executes the processing of step A1028. The commands at the time of RAM initialization include a model designation command, a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command, a probability information command, a command for RAM initialization, and the like. By the RAM initialization command,
The effect control device 300 displays a customer waiting demonstration on the screen of the display device 41, and informs RAM initialization by the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 and the upper speakers 19a and 19b (for example, 30 seconds).

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1022 and
The RAM initialization command transmitted in the process of 027 further includes an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time saving number of times information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time saving state.

The game control device 100 includes a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
) start the circuit (A1028). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 11 based on the frequency-divided signal.
1a is provided with a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers the random number update to be supplied to the timer interrupt signal and the random number generation circuit with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

After executing the CTC activation process of step A1028, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1029). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC
update permission register) to set the code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit, etc.
It is performed by PU 111a. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining jackpot patterns (jackpot patterns) Random number 1 and jackpot pattern random number 2)) are saved in a predetermined area of RWM as initial values (start values) (A1030), and interrupts are permitted (A1031). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1032). Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, and the small hit pattern random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) with the same period.

In addition, in the big hit pattern random number and the small hit pattern random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Note that each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1,
A random update may be used in which all values within a range appear randomly without duplication until a cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number and the small hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process of step A1032, the game control device 100, the power supply device 40
Set the number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from 0 via the port and data bus (A1033), and determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10
34). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1034 is "N"), step A
Return to the initial value random number update process of 1032 . That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (A1031) before the initial value random number update process (A1032), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be initialized. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process due to waiting due to the value random number update process.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step A1032 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt before updating and releasing the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the game control device 10
0 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal has been kept ON for the number of checks set in step A1033 (A1035). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is "N"), the process returns to step A1034 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is "Y"), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, once interrupt is prohibited (A1036), and OFF data is output to all output ports (A103
7).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1038), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (
A1039). Further, checksum calculation processing is executed to calculate the checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1040), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1041).
). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1042), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111c capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, , and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of checksum calculation processing. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1040 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

The game control device 100 first sets the start address of RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and "0" is set as the calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of the RAM being used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the contents of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and reduces the number of repetitions by -1.
Update (A1106). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the checksum is completed (A
1107).

The game control device 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107 when the calculation of the checksum is not finished (the result of A1107 is "N"). When the checksum calculation is finished (the result of A1107 is "Y"), the checksum calculation process is finished.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1032 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

The game control device 100 updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1201). Then, the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), and the initial value random number update process is terminated.

Here, "big hit design initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop design, and "small hit design initial value random number" is the random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop design. is.

As described above, the randomness of the random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, takes in signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). moreover,
Based on the output data set in various processes, the solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b,
39b) and the like (A130
4). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state. .

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1305), further random number update process 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower special winning port switch 38a, and the upper special winning port switch 39a, and the monitoring of errors. (Whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) Winning hole switch/status monitoring processing is executed (A1308).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 includes a starting port 1 switch 36a and a starting port 2 switch 37a.
Executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening (A1309). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game processing for performing the processing related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed (A1310
), then execute the special figure 2 game processing for performing the processing related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A1
311). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing are shown in FIGS.
will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the game machine 10, and executes a segment LED editing process for driving the segment LEDs for displaying various information about special figure variation games and games so as to display desired contents. (A1312). Details of the segment LED editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1313). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1314). Details of the magnet fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process are shown in FIG.
will be described later.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1315). Details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends. When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input processing (A1303) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of input processing.

The game control device 100 first reads the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (A1402).

Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read input port 1, that is, the state of the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A14
04), prepare the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (A1405). continue,
Unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and further bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, switch read processing is executed (A1408). Here, "preparation" in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but it is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A
1409), prepare the address of input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A
1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Furthermore, after that, switch read processing is executed (A14
13), ending the input process.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch read processing (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input processing will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of switch read processing.

The game control device 100 first reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be reversed is reversed (A1503), and the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is saved ( store) (A1504). After that, it waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

After the delay time (0.1 ms) has passed, the game control device 100 reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port for the second time (A1506). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be reversed is reversed (A1508), and the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is saved ( store) (A1509). After that, in the first and second readings, a defined bit pattern is created in which bits with the same state are set to 1 and bits with different states are set to 0 (A1510). bit (A1511).

Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first and second readings (A1512), and the undetermined bit pattern and the previous interrupt A logical AND with the definite state is taken, and the bit is set as the previous holding bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like is removed.

Then, the game control device 100 synthesizes the current fixed bit and the last held bit, and saves it as the current fixed state (A1514). Furthermore, the exclusive OR of the previous and current definite states is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). After that, the switch reading process is terminated.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process and compared with the result of the previous reading to change the signal. Although there is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been processed, there is a possibility that such a determination may not be made correctly if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt is processed. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing switch read processing twice in one interrupt processing with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above problem.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1304) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) OFF data to the port 135 (see FIG. 7) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601).
Next, the solenoid output port 13 that outputs the data of the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b
4 is synthesized and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (A1604). Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output/external information output port 136 (A1606). After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A
1607), and outputs the loaded data to the segment output port 135 (A160
8).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data for launch permission (A161
0), and output the finally combined data to the external information/fire permission signal output port 137 (
A1611). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1612). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1613).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, (A1614). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1615
). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1616), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of payout command transmission processing.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out prize balls. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the prize number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). This is an area to be used, and stores prize winning data corresponding to prize balls for which main prize ball signal generation processing has not been performed. That is, the prize number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 also outputs a payout prize ball signal to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By matching these two signals,
Unauthorized payouts can be monitored.

Each of these winning number counter areas has the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (e.g., 2 prize balls, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 13 prize balls, 14 prize balls). ) is provided with a winning number counter area, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated with a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored.
This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which it is sent. This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control device 100 selects the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. It is determined whether or not there is a count number that is not "0" in the number counter area.

If there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2, the game control device 100 (A170
1 result is "N"), update the address of winning number counter area 2 to be checked (
A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers of all winning number counter areas has been completed (A1703).

When all the checks are completed, the game control device 100 (the result of A1703 is "
Y"), and the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is "N"), the process returns to step A1701 and repeats the processes from step A1701 to step A1703.

In addition, if there is a count number, the game control device 100 (the result of A1701 is "Y"
), subtract (-1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1704), and obtain the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 (A1705). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved as a new number of remaining number of prize balls in the remaining number of prize balls area (A1707). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before the processing of step A1707, a fraction that is less than the predetermined number that is the reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). And if it is not 0 or more, (A1709
result is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is "Y"), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (A17
10), save the subtraction result in the prize ball remaining number area (A1711), and step A170
Return to the process of 8.

Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting to the outside of the gaming machine a main prize ball signal including information regarding the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as the game balls enter a predetermined prize area. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls is concentrated during a big win, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the accuracy of the prize ball signal generated during the big win is delayed. It is possible to prevent the problem that the number of winning balls cannot be counted.

The game control device 100 updates the payout command transmission timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A171
2), it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer has reached 0 (A1713). When the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is "N"), the payout command transmission process is terminated. Also, when the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status (flag) is in a busy state (busy state flag) (A1714).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start the payout control immediately, and when the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is on (
busy state). That is, the payout busy signal can also be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal serves as a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) indicates the payout control device 200 based on the state of the payout busy signal.
is information that sets whether or not the payout control can be started immediately, and is an idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, a busy state in which payout control cannot be started immediately, and an undefined state in which the state is indeterminate is set.

When the payout busy signal status is in the busy state, the game control device 100 (A1
If the result of 714 is "Y"), the payout command transmission process is terminated. The non-busy state includes an idle state and an undefined state. Thus, the payout control device 2
If 00 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, the subsequent processing related to sending the payout command is not performed, thereby preventing unnecessary processing and reducing the burden of control. I am trying to reduce it.

The undefined state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area during power-on processing. This indefinite state is set to an idle state or a busy state based on the status of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period in a state indicating that the payout control can or cannot be started immediately. to resolve. That is, when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. Instead, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 continuously outputting over a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately grasps that the payout process can be performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being broken.

If the payout busy signal status is not in a busy state, the game control device 100 (A1
If the result of 714 is "N"), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked has a non-zero count. Determine whether or not there is

Then, if there is no count number, the game control device 100 (the result of A1715 is "N
”), update the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and determine whether or not the count numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked (A17
17). When all the checks are completed (the result of A1717 is "Y"), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if all checks have not been completed (A171
7 is "N"), the process returns to step A1715, and steps A1715 to A17
Repeat the process up to 17.

In addition, if there is a count number, the game control device 100 (the result of A1715 is "Y"
), subtract (-1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1718), and acquire the payout command corresponding to the target winning number counter area (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), the initial value is set to the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and is set to 200 ms as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) is generated in units of winning one prize in the prize winning area, and is transmitted to the payout control device 200 . The payout control device 200 performs control to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. It constitutes a prize ball command transmission means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when indicated.

In this way, the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, the data corresponding to winning prizes that have not yet been paid out are held on the game control device 100 side, so that they are backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up by the payout control device 200.例文帳に追加Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for doing so.

In a conventional game machine (for example, the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. data to maintain the payout control state. However, conventional gaming machines require a backup function,
There was a problem that it would lead to an increase in cost. According to this embodiment, the payout control device 200
Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for backing up to.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the payout of prize balls can be performed by an external device such as a hall computer. It will be possible to accurately grasp the timing, for example, to accurately grasp the base value. In addition, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball have different transmission timings. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be reliably managed.

From the above, as well as performing overall game control, the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38 , Second special variable winning device 39) Based on the game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball, and based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means,
A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of game balls is provided, and the game control means is output from the payout control means and indicates whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. Based on the signal (busy signal), control is performed to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, a state indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means Even if the signal is output, the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without immediately transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. Correspondingly, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Also, in the game area 32, a winning area with a different number of winning balls (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39) is provided. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control has not been transmitted for each number of prize balls. and when the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200) The status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control prior to specifying whether or not there is a prize ball command that has not been transmitted to each prize ball command counter. It means that we are trying to do it.

In addition, as well as performing overall game control, predetermined winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second
Starting winning port 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 3
9) Game control means (game control device 100
), and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means outputs from the payout control means Prize ball command transmission means (
A game control device 100) and external information for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) containing information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as the game balls enter a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. Output means (game control device 100), and the external information output means outputs a prize ball signal regardless of whether the state signal output from the payout control means is capable of starting payout control by the payout control means. will be output.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100), when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the prize ball command transmission means immediately is not sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information regarding prize ball commands, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information regarding prize ball signals (main prize ball signals). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning region (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35 , 1st special variable winning device 38, 2nd special variable winning device 39) generates a prize ball command in units of one winning, and when the state signal indicates that payout control can be started, one to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) receives the winning information in units of one winning to a predetermined winning area can be stored, and updating is performed when a game ball wins a prize in a predetermined winning area, and updating is performed in correspondence with transmission of a prize ball command to the payout control means, so that a prize ball command that has not been transmitted The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be put out as the game balls enter a predetermined prize winning area, and outputs a prize ball signal each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is configured to be output to the outside of the game machine, and the winning ball signal counter can store information on the winning in units of one winning to a predetermined winning area, and the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area is possible. It is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated by updating the number of prize balls in accordance with the accumulation processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means.

[Random Number Update Processing 1]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the random number update process 1. As shown in FIG. Random number update processing 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The random number update process 1 is
This is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big-hit symbol random number and the small-hit symbol random number, which are targets of the initial value random number update process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) to be set (A1801).

The game control device 100, when the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (A1801
result is "N"), the processing after step A1804 is executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot design random number is waiting for initial value setting (the result of A1801 is "Y"), the jackpot design initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the small winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the small hit pattern random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (A
If the result of 1804 is "N"), the random number update process 1 ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the small winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (A1
The result of 804 is "Y"), load the small winning design initial value random number as the next initial value (A18
05). Then, the next initial value of the loaded small winning pattern random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A18
06), the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random Number Update Processing 2]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second random number update process. Random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number update process 2 is
It is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers.
Both are to be updated, and the update target is switched each time an interrupt occurs. moreover,
When the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, update processing is performed at different interrupt times for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach fluctuation mode determination) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. is configured as follows.

First, the game control device 100 updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process (A1
901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit judgment value for each type of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random numbers have made a round.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter to which a random value is set (A1904).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, is set in the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower order of the M1 counter Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of a 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is "Y"), the value remaining after masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as the addition value ( (hereinafter referred to as "masked value") is added with "1", the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is "N"), sets the upper 1 byte to "0" as the addition value, and sets the lower 1 byte to The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0" and that the value remains unchanged by adding "0".

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1
909). If it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is "Y"), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is "N")
, "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number, and the value (1 byte) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

The game control device 100 sets a value obtained by adding the additional value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number as a new random number, and determines whether the new random number is greater than the upper limit determination value obtained in the process of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

Then, if the new random number value is not greater than the upper limit judgment value, the game control device 100 (
If the result of A1913 is "N"), the new random number is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (A1915). Also, if the new random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A1913 is "Y"), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number is used again as a new random number (A1914). The random number is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (A1915).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (
A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "N"), random number update processing 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "Y
'), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (A1917), and the random number update process 2 is terminated.

Thus, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variation display games. Therefore, the CPU 111a
Variation pattern for determining the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 It constitutes random number update means for updating random numbers.

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process. The winning hole switch/state monitoring process is step A130 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.
8.

The game control device 100 first prepares the cheating monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper special winning opening switch 39a (two pieces) in the upper special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) (A2001). Then, a fraudulent and winning monitoring process is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and to detect a normal winning (A2002). Details of the illegality & winning monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20 .

The fraud monitoring table contains a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraud winning number area, the fraud winning error notification command, the fraud Information on the upper limit of the number of winnings (the number of determined fraudulent occurrences), a winning opening monitoring table, and notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. In addition, information on the number of repetitions of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1, and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined in the winning opening monitoring table. These fraud monitoring table and winning slot monitoring table are prepared for each switch to be monitored.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower special winning opening switch 38a in the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (A2003). and,
Execute fraud & winning monitoring processing to monitor fraudulent winnings and detect normal winnings (A2
004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win (A2005). ), a winning number counter update process for updating the winning number is executed (A2006).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process (A2007).
In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation number) is counted as the number of abnormal fluctuations in the normal game state (when the probability is low), and the number of abnormal fluctuations is the specified value ( For example, when 5) is reached, the effect control device 300 is made to perform error notification. The details of the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose state should be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time (A2008 ). The state scan counter is updated with a range of 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2009). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2010).
. Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shot ball running out error) based on the shot ball running out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. State scan counter value is 2
, monitoring of the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state (discharge abnormality error) based on the dispensation abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2012).

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave fraud signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2013). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2013
result is "N"), the winning opening switch/status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0, the game control device 100 (A2
The result of 013 is "Y"), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2014), and gaming machine status check processing is executed to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2015).
.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 3 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. Incidentally, in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter is 1 to 3, it is not defined.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes payout busy signal check processing for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2016 ), ending the winning slot switch/status monitoring process. Details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that the processing from steps A2014 to A2016 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, if the timer interrupt occurs every 4 ms, 1
Processing from A2014 to A2016 is performed every 6 ms.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Process]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of fraud & winning monitoring processing. The cheating & winning monitoring process is performed by steps A2002 and A2 in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.
004.

The fraud & winning monitoring process is performed by the lower big winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the second
This is a process performed for the upper big winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39. FIG. As for the big winning openings (special variable winning devices 38, 39), fraudulent acts such as forcibly opening the opening/closing member, inserting game balls, and paying out the winning balls are likely to occur, so fraud is monitored in addition to detection of winning. .

The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring (A2101), and determines whether or not it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2102).
The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the lower large winning opening switch 38a. Alternatively, it is a period other than the special game state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors is the upper big winning opening switch 39a.

Then, if the game control device 100 is in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "
Y"), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). In addition, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is "Y"), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the fraudulent winning number after the addition is used to determine the illegal occurrence of the monitoring target. It is determined whether or not the number (for example, 5) is equal to or more (A2105).

The reason why the determination number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball passes the effective period of the count switch. This is to avoid judging that the game is fraudulent when the player wins a prize or the signal contains noise, and to avoid easily judging an error even though the game is not fraudulent.

Then, if the game control device 100 is not equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is "
N"), and prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110). again,
If it is equal to or greater than the determined number (the result of A2105 is "Y"), the number of fraudulent prizes is kept at the fraudulent occurrence determination number (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms
) is saved (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraudulent occurrence command (A2108), and further prepares a fraudulent prize occurrence flag as a fraudulent flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "N
”), prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110), and executes winning number counter update processing for setting winning balls (A2111). Details of the winning number counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112).
, determines whether or not there is permission to update the notification timer (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the illegality & winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is "Y"), if the target notification timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

The update of the notification timer is performed when the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors is the upper large winning opening switch 3.
If it is 9a, it is permitted, and if the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the other upper big winning opening switch 39a, it is not permitted. As a result, the update of the notification timer is doubled for the illegal notification about the second special variable winning device 39, and the predetermined time (for example, 6
0000 ms) is prevented from being timed up. In addition, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the lower big winning opening switch 38a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A211
5) If the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the notification timer is 0 (
If the result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancellation command is prepared (A2116), and an illegal winning cancellation flag is prepared as a fraud flag (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

When the game control device 100 is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process of this time, clears the target number of illegal winnings (A2119).

In addition, after the processing of step A2119 is completed, or if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "N"), the game control device 100 detects the illegality & winning monitoring processing before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in step A2120, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area.

Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. again,
If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (result of A2120 is "N"), save the prepared fraud flag in the target fraud flag area (A2121),
Command setting processing is executed (A2122). After that, the illegality & prize-winning monitoring process is ended.

By the above processing, the fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the occurrence of fraud, the fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the cancellation of the fraud, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Processing for updating winning number counter]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of winning number counter update processing. Winning number counter update processing is executed in step A2111 of fraud & winning monitoring processing shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first acquires the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (exactly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (A2202). If there is no input (result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2212).

On the other hand, the game control device 100 (A220
2 result is "Y"), the value of target win number counter area 1 is loaded (A2203), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2204). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value causes an overflow (A2205).

If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2205 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the processing of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is "Y"), the value of target win number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether the updated value causes an overflow (A2209). If no overflow occurs (the result of A2209 is "N"), the updated value is saved in winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the processing of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "Y"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches has ended (A2212).

If the monitoring of all switches has not been completed (the result of A2212 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch in step A2202.
return to the process of Also, when monitoring of all switches is completed (the result of A2212 is "Y"
), the process of updating the winning number counter is terminated. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning to the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Production command setting process]
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (
A2301). Further, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A2302).

Also, if the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2302 is "N"), the game control device 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2303).

If the transmission buffer is full, the game control device 100 (the result of A2302 is "Y
”), and the process returns to step A2301.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A2304), and determines whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A2305). If the transmission buffer is full (result of A2305 is "Y"), the process returns to step A2304.

Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2305 is "N"), the game control device 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2306), and then sets the effect command. End the process.

As described above, by transmitting the performance commands to the performance control device 300 through serial communication, the load on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the performance commands can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is no longer necessary to take in commands within the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal Fluctuation Monitoring Process]
FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process. The special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process is step A200 in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.
7.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation check flag is set (A2401). In addition, as will be described later, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set each time the special figure 1 variation display game starts in a low probability state (including normal game state). If the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2401 is "
N"), and the process proceeds to step A2407.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A2401
The result is "Y"), clear the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A2402), and +1 update the special figure 1 fluctuation number (add only 1) (A2403). Then, it is determined whether or not special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (eg 18) (A2404). When special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than specified value (the result of A2404 is "Y"), it moves to the processing of step A2407.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number is equal to or more than the specified value (the result of A2404 is "N"
), If the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not 0, update -1 (subtract only 1) (A2405), special figure 1
The number of variations is cleared to 0 (A2406).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation check flag is set (A2407). If the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not set (A240
7 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2410. In addition, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set each time when the special figure 2 variation display game starts in a low probability state (including normal game state).

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A2407
The result is "Y"), clear the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (A2408), and update the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number by +1 (A2409). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is smaller than a specified value (eg 5) (A2410).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is equal to or more than the specified value (the result of A2410 is "
N"), set the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the specified value used for the determination of step A2410 (A2411). Next, set the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer as an error notification timer (A2412), and prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation ( A2413), to prepare a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command as a production command (A2414), and to move to the processing of step A2419.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2410 is "Y"), -1 updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer (A2415). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer has timed up (A2416). If the time is not up (the result of A2416 is "N"), end the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process.

Game control device 100, when the time is up (result of A2416 is "Y"), special figure 2
Prepare an abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag (A2417), prepare a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command as a production command (A2418). Next, the prepared flag determines whether it is the same as the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (A2419). The prepared flag is the current special figure 2
If it is the same as the value of the abnormal fluctuation flag area (the result of A2419 is "Y"), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated.

Game control device 100, when the prepared flag is different from the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (the result of A2419 is "N"), whether the prepared flag is special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag is determined (A2420). If the prepared flag is not a release flag (A242
If the result of 0 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2422.

Game control device 100, when the prepared flag is a release flag (the result of A2420 is "Y"), clears the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number to 0 (A2421). That is, in a state in which the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag is set in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag is prepared (A2417), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is cleared to 0 do. After that, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area in RWM (A2422). That is, when the prepared flag is different from the flag of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is rewritten to the prepared flag. Next, the production command setting process for setting the production command is executed (A2423), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated.

In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal variation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 variation display game) is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area, the external information editing process described later , the security signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information. When the production control device 300 receives the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation generation command as the production command, the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b execute the notification of the error.

In the normal game state (with a low jackpot probability), the player normally hits to the left and aims to win the first start prize-winning port 36, but the second start prize-winning port 37 is preferred over the first start prize-winning port 36. The player may aim at the second starting prize opening 37 by hitting to the right when winning a prize is advantageous to the player (when the probability of a small win is high). In this case, the winning to the second start winning opening 37 may cause the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed, and an error is reported to the player to stop hitting to the right. It should be noted that, in the normal game state, when left-handed hitting is performed,
Processing is performed in the normal route like the dotted line in FIG. 23, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation generation command (ie error notification) does not occur, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer does not start.

The special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process will be further described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 24A to 24C. FIGS. 24A-24C illustrate the results of the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process described above.

As shown in FIG. 24A, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed a plurality of times in the normal game state (hitting probability is low probability), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches the specified value (here, 5) (A241
The result of 0 is "N"), the initial value (60 seconds) of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command can be set (A2412, A2414), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command was received The production control device 300 can start reporting an error using the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

After that, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted by 1 from the specified value (here 5) (A
2411), unless the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set again, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is continuously updated by -1 from the next special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process and can be clocked (A2410
result is "Y"). Effect control device 300 can continue the error notification until the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer times up due to the lapse of the period (60 seconds) corresponding to the initial value and receives the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command. Note that the payout of prize balls is performed even during the error notification.

During the error notification period (60 seconds), external information is output to the external information terminal 71, and an error occurrence can be notified to an external device such as a hall computer. A machine error status signal can be output (external information editing process to be described later).

In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches the specified value (here 5) again during the timing of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer (during error notification), the initial value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is again 60 seconds error notification can be started from there (timer reset). Also, a big hit (
At the time of start), transmit the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command, clear the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number, special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer, special figure 1 fluctuation number to 0 (special figure display processing to be described later, fanfare /
during interval processing transition setting processing).

In addition, in FIG. 23, the variation check flag is set when the special figure variation display game starts in a low probability state, but the variation check flag is in a low probability state and there was a prize to the start winning opening You may perform control as what is set in case. In this case, as shown in FIG. 24B, control is performed using the number of winning prizes instead of the variable number, and the winning to the second start winning port 37 in the normal game state (special figure 2 winning) is multiple times, Fig. 2 The number of abnormal winnings is the specified value (here, 5
), error notification can be started.

Also, in the control of FIG. 23, as shown in FIG. 24A, after the end of the error notification by the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is set to 0 (A2421), but as shown in FIG. 24B,
Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number (abnormal winning number) may be maintained at a specified value.

In Figure 24C, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value (here 18) (the result of A2404 is "N"), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 and is reduced from 4 to 3, for example (A2405
), the situation where the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 and changes from 18 to 0 is shown (A240
6). In this way, in the normal game state (hit probability is low probability), special figure 2 by hitting to the right
Even if the variation display game is executed multiple times and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number rises, when the player returns to left hitting (stops right hitting) and the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value, special FIG. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations can be reduced to avoid error notification.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The game machine status check process is step A201 in the winning opening switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.
0, A2012 and A2015.

The game control device 100 first acquires the state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2501). The state scan counter is set to a value ranging from 0 to 3 corresponding to the game state. Incidentally, the relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is ON (
A2502). If the signal to be checked is not ON (the result of A2502 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is OFF, a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (A2503), and the target state OFF command is acquired. and prepare (A2504). Furthermore, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2505). The state-off flag indicates a normal state with respect to error-related signals, and indicates a no-touch state with respect to touch switch signals.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is ON (the result of A2502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a state ON flag as a state flag (A2506), acquires the target state ON command, prepares (A2507). Furthermore, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2508). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for error-related signals, and indicates a touched state for touch switch signals.

When the processing of step A2505 or step A2508 ends, the game control device 100
(A2
509). If they do not match (result of A2509 is "N"), save the acquired signal status in the target signal control area (A2510), and clear the target status monitoring timer (A2510).
2511).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2512).
. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the corresponding timer comparison value (A2513). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by -1, and the timer comparison value - It remains at a value of 1 (A2514). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2515). If they match (A251
5 is "Y"), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2515 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2516). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2517), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state ON command is an error type command, the effect control device 300 is made to start error notification.

[Payment busy signal check processing]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of payout busy signal check processing. The payout busy signal check process is executed at step A2016 in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (A2601). The payout busy signal is the payout control device 20
It is turned on when 0 cannot start payout control.

If the payout busy signal is not on (the result of A2601 is "
N"), prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2602), and sets an OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) (A2603). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (the result of A2601 is "Y"), a busy state flag is prepared as a determination status (A2604), and an ON determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2605) ).

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state (on/off) of the current payout busy signal (A2606). If they match (the result of A2606 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2609. If they do not match (the result of A2606 is "N"), the state of the busy signal to be paid out this time is saved in the busy signal state area (A2607), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2608).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 (A2609), and determines whether or not the monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the timer comparison value (A2610). If the watchdog timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2610 is "N"), the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

Game control device 100, when the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (the result of A2610 is "Y"), updates the busy signal monitoring timer by -1 and keeps it at a value smaller than the timer comparison value by 1 (A2611). , the prepared status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2612), and the payout busy signal check process ends.

By the payout busy signal check processing, the payout busy signal flag (
busy signal status) is set. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, and the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the timer comparison value. etc.

Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and remains in an undefined state until any signal state continues for the timer comparison value. As a result, when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. , and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately grasps that the payout process can be performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being broken.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting port switch monitoring process (A1309) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and executes hard random number acquisition processing for acquiring hard random numbers. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting opening prize to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703). Then, when there is no start-up winning (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting opening winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703
(A2704)
. And if it is in a low probability state (including during a normal game state) (the result of A2704 is "Y"
), the process proceeds to step A2707.

If the probability of winning is not in a low probability state (if it is in a high probability state) (the result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a right-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A2705), and effects Command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display on the display device 41 as a warning a right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handed when there is a starting opening prize to the first starting winning opening 36 in a high probability state. can.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension due to winning to the first start winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting port 1 switch processing (A2708 ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting opening 2 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning to the second starting winning opening (starting opening 2) 37 (A2709), and executes hard random number acquisition processing for obtaining hard random numbers. (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting opening prize to the second starting winning opening 37 (A2711). If there is no start-up prize (the result of A2711 is "N"
), ending the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting opening winning to the second starting winning opening 37 (A2711
result is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (that is, a variable probability state) (A2712). If it is not in a high probability state (if it is in a low probability state) (the result of A2712 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit state (A2713). If it is not in the big hit state (the result of A2713 is "N"), it is determined whether it is in the high probability final fluctuation (A27
14). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag that is set in the high-probability fluctuation frequency updating process described later.

Here, the high probability final variation (high probability final variation) is the final special figure variation display game when the special figure variation display game starts in a high probability state, for example, ST (special time) This is the final special figure variation display game when the high probability state is maintained with respect to the start of variation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the end of the big hit.

If the game control device 100 is not in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A2714 is "N"),
A left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2715), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2716). As a result, the performance control device 300 displays the left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handed hitting on the display device 41 as a warning when there is a start-up prize to the second start-up prize-winning port 37 during the normal game state. can be done.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold due to the winning to the second start winning port 37 (starting port 2) (A2717), and executes the special figure starting port 2 switch processing (
A2718), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (result of A2712 is "Y"), if it is in a jackpot state (result of A2713 is "Y"), if it is in a high probability final fluctuation (result of A2714 is "Y"), the processing of steps A2717 and A2718 is executed without preparing the left-handed instruction notification command.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2
710) will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of hard random number acquisition processing.

The game control device 100, first, sets start-up no-win information indicating that there is no start-up win (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2802).
, if there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "N"), the hardware random number acquisition process is terminated. The target switch is the starter 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the starter 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

The game control device 100, when there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "Y
”), read the random number latch register status (state of the random number latch register), and determine whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A2803, A2804).
If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is "N"), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

If the game control device 100 has latch data in the target random number latch register (A280
The result of 4 is "Y"), load the extracted jackpot random number into the target hard random number latch register (A2805), and set starter win information indicating that there is a starter win (A2806). . It should be noted that the prepared jackpot random number is used in special figure starting port 1 switch processing and special figure starting port 2 switch processing.

[Special figure start gate 1 switch processing]
Next, the special figure starting port 1 switch processing (A2708
) will be described in detail. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 1 switch process.

First, the game control device 100 loads the starting port 1 signal output count, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 1 switch 36a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 (A2901). Furthermore, the value of the loaded start port 1 signal output count is updated by +1 (A2
902), and it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (A2903).

If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start port 1 signal output number region of RWM (A2904
). On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process of step A2905 is executed without executing the process of step A2904.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the update target special figure holding (start memory) number corresponding to the start port 1 switch 36a is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A2905). When the special figure reservation number is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port 1 switch processing is terminated.

Game control device 100, when the number of special figures pending is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A2906), updates the number of special figures 1 pending +1 (A2907). It should be noted that the special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including sorting of look-ahead variation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number (A2908), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process in the RWM jackpot random number storage area (A2909 ). Next, the jackpot pattern random numbers are extracted and prepared (A291
0), the jackpot pattern random number is saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).
Furthermore, a small winning design random number is extracted and saved in the small winning design random number storage area of RWM (A2
912). Next, save the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas of the RWM (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) ( A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure reservation information determination process (prefetching process, advance determination process) for determining the special figure reservation information (A2914), and the decoration special figure 1 reservation number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number The command is prepared as an effect command (A2915), and effect command setting processing is executed (A
2916), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is terminated. In addition, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special figure start gate 2 switch processing]
Next, the special figure starting port 2 switch processing (A2718
) will be described in detail. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing.

The start port 2 signal output count, which is the number of times information regarding the number of wins to the start port 2 switch 37a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (A3001). moreover,
The value of the loaded start port 2 signal output count is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A3003).

If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start port 2 signal output count area of RWM (A3004
). On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines that the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid, that is, the starting opening 2
It is determined whether or not the detection of the switch 37a is disabled (A3005). In addition, during the stop of the big hit change / small hit change (during the processing during the special figure display described later), during the big hit state (from the stop of the big hit change to the end processing of the big hit described later), during the small hit state (from the stop of the small hit change Until the small hit end processing described later), when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed (during fluctuation), even if there is a game ball entering the second start winning opening 37, the second start It is treated as if there was no winning in the winning opening 37 and is invalidated. Game control device 100, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid (result of A3005 is "Y"), ends the special figure starting opening 2 switch processing.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the winning to the second start winning port 37 is not invalid (A3
The result of 005 is "N"), the number of special figures 2 pending is set to 1 (A3006). In addition, as soon as the special figure 2 start memory occurs, the special figure 2 variable display game is configured to start, but the special figure 2 reservation number is set to 1 due to the necessity of control. Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 start memory (A3007), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process in the RWM jackpot random number storage area (A3008). .

Subsequently, the jackpot pattern random number is extracted (A3009), and the jackpot pattern random number is saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A3010). Furthermore, a small hit pattern random number is extracted and RWM
(A3011). Next, save the variation pattern random number (variation pattern random number 2, 3) in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) (A3012), special figure start entrance 2 End the switch processing.

In addition, as described above, as soon as the special figure 2 start memory occurs, the special figure 2 variation display game is configured to start, so in the special figure start opening 2 switch processing, unlike the special figure start opening 1 switch processing , Special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetching process, advance determination process) is not performed, and decoration special figure 2
No hold count command is prepared.

In this way, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the starting winning areas of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, and performs the variable display game. It constitutes a starting winning memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory to be an execution right. In addition, the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 as the first starting memory ( Special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 start winning memory), and various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 37 are set to the upper limit of a predetermined number (here 1) It is stored as 2 start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 start winning memory).

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, special figure reservation information determination processing (A2914) in the above-mentioned special figure start mouth 1 switch process
will be described in detail. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetching processing, prior determination processing). In addition, the special figure reservation information determination process is executed only for the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 .

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (that is, variable probability state) (A3101). If it is not in a high probability state (the result of A3101 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit state (A3102). If it is not in the jackpot state (the result of A3102 is "N"), the jackpot determination process is executed based on the jackpot random number value stored as the first start memory (A3103).

It should be noted that if the high probability state (result of A3101 is "Y"), or if it is in the jackpot state (result of A3102 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process does not perform the jackpot determination process etc. Terminate as it is (pre-determination (prefetching) is not performed).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (A3104). If the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3104 is "Y"), a big hit pattern random number check table is set (A3105), and the big hit stop pattern information corresponding to the prepared big hit pattern random number is acquired (A3106), step A3111. to process.

The game control device 100, if the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (in case of loss) (the result of A3104 is "N"), performs the small hit determination process based on the big hit random value stored as the first start memory. Execute (A3107), and determine whether the determination result is a small hit (
A3108). In addition, in this embodiment, a big hit random number is used also for determination of a small hit.

If the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (the result of A3108 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information for the small hit (A3109), and if the determination result is not a small hit (A3108 (A3110), the stop symbol information is set (A3110).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the acquired or set stop symbol information as an effect command (A3111), and executes effect command setting processing (A3112). Then, special figure 1 information setting processing (A3113) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 1 for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game A variation pattern setting process (A3114) is executed.
Subsequently, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number and the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A3115), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3116).

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 game processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is in a big hit state or a small hit state (A3201). If neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3201 is "N"), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3202). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the number of game balls at the lower big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 Monitor detections.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (
subtract 1) (A3203). The special figure 1 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. If it is during the big hit state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3201 is "Y"), the process of step A3203 is performed without performing the process of step A3202. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3204). If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (A3204
result is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3219.

If the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3204 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the special figure 1
The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the game process number is set in the register (A3205). Furthermore, the special figure 1 game sequence branch table is used to acquire the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3
206). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made by the special figure 1 game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special figure 1 game processing number (A3207).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A3207, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure 1 fluctuation Special figure 1 Normal processing is executed (A3208). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 usual processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A3207, the game control device 100
And the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1, to perform the special figure 1 during fluctuation processing such as the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display (A3209). In addition, the details of the processing during special figure 1 fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 .

If the game processing number is "2" at step A3207, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot, the fanfare command is set according to the jackpot type, the fanfare time is set according to the jackpot opening pattern of each jackpot, and the fanfare/interval processing is performed. Special figure 1 to set the information necessary for
During display processing is executed (A3210). In addition, for details of the special figure 1 display processing, see FIG.
7 later.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A3207, the game control device 100
Fanfare/interval processing for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of openings, and setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A3211). Details of the fanfare/during interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A3207, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, and the processing of setting the information necessary for the processing of the remaining balls of the big winning gate, etc. Open the big winning gate. Intermediate processing is executed (A3212). The details of the processing during the opening of the big winning opening will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A3207, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing. Execute (A3213). For details of the processing of remaining balls in the big winning hole, see FIG.
will be described later.

If the game processing number is "6" at step A3207, the game control device 100
To set the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), perform the special figure 1 jackpot end processing for setting the information necessary for executing the special figure 1 normal process (A3214). In addition, special figure 1
Details of the jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "7" at step A3207, the game control device 100
Small win fanfare process for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the small win process, etc. is executed (A3215). In addition, the details of the processing during the small winning fanfare will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 .

If the game processing number is "8" at step A3207, the game control device 100
A process for setting a small hit end command and a small hit middle process for setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process are executed (A3216). In addition, the details of the process during the small hit will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 .

If the game processing number is "9" at step A3207, the game control device 100
Execute processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, and small winning remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 small winning end processing (A3217) .
Details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "10" at step A3207, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), or information necessary for executing special figure 1 normal processing Executes special figure 1 small hit end processing for setting etc. (A3218). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 .

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A3219), special figure 1 display The symbol variation control processing related to the device 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game processing is ended.

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is in a big hit state or a small hit state (A3301). If neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3301 is "N"), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the number of game balls at the lower big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 Monitor detections.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (
subtract 1) (A3303). The special figure 2 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. If it is during the big hit state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3301 is "Y"), the process of step A3303 is performed without performing the process of step A3302. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3304). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3304
result is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3322.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the game control device 100 special figure 2
It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is "N"),
The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3306), and the timer value for long fluctuations (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (
A3307). It should be noted that, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game is a long variation, and when the variation time is long (eg, 10 minutes), the timer for the variation time cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3303-A3307 By repeating the count of the timer value for long fluctuation by the processing of , a timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y") and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y") , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3308). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3309). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special figure 2 game processing number (A3310).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A3310, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure 2 fluctuation Special figure 2 Normal processing is executed (A3311). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 usual processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A3310, the game control device 100
And the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, to perform the special figure 2 during fluctuation processing such as the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 2 display (A3312). In addition, the details of the processing during special figure 2 fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A3310, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the jackpot, the fanfare time is set according to the jackpot opening pattern of each jackpot, and the fanfare/interval processing is performed. Special figure 2 to set the information necessary for
During display processing is executed (A3313). In addition, for details of the special figure 2 display process, see FIG.
8 later.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A3310, the game control device 100
Fanfare/interval processing for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of openings, and setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A3314). It should be noted that the fanfare/during-interval processing is common to that executed within the special-figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A3310, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, and the processing of setting the information necessary for the processing of the remaining balls of the big winning gate, etc. Open the big winning gate. Intermediate processing is executed (A3315). It should be noted that the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A3310, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing. Execute (A3316). Incidentally, the big winning hole remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "6" at step A3310, the game control device 100
Special figure 2 big hit ending processing which does the setting and the like of the information which is necessary in order to execute special figure 2 usual processing is executed (A3317). The details of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "7" at step A3310, the game control device 100
Small win fanfare process for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the small winning process, etc. is executed (A3318). It should be noted that the process during the small win fanfare is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "8" at step A3310, the game control device 100
A process for setting a small hit end command and a small hit middle process for setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process are executed (A3319). It should be noted that the small hit middle process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 .

If the game processing number is "9" at step A3310, the game control device 100
Execute processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, and small winning remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 small winning end processing (A3320) .
Incidentally, the minor hit remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "10" at step A3310, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3321). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 .

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A3322), special figure 2 display The symbol variation control processing related to the device 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game processing is ended.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the big winning opening switch monitoring process (A
3202, A3302) will be described in detail. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is open (A3401), and if the upper large winning opening is not open (the result of A3401 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening are being processed (A3402). If the upper big winning opening is not being processed for remaining balls (the result of A3402 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the lower big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (A3403). In addition, in the case of the big win state or the small win state, the upper big winning hole and/or the lower big winning hole can be open.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of opening the lower prize winning opening (the result of A3403 is "Y")
, It is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (A3404), and if there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (result of A3404 is "Y"), addition is made in this special winning opening switch monitoring process. A win counter for counting the number of wins to the big win opening is set to 1 (A3405). If the lower special prize opening is not open (result of A3403 is "N"), or if there is no input to the lower special prize opening switch (result of A3404 is "N"), end the special prize winning opening switch monitoring process. do.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in the process of opening the upper grand prize winning opening (the result of A3401 is "
Y"), or if the remaining balls in the upper grand winning opening are being processed (result of A3402 is "Y"), the winning counter is set to 0 (A3406). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 of the upper special winning opening switches 39a (A3407), and if there is no input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3407 is "N") ), the process proceeds to step A3411.

The game control device 100, when there is an input to the upper large winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3407 is "Y"), prepares a large winning opening count command as an effect command in order to perform a winning effect (A3408), An effect command setting process is executed (A3409), and the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3410).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (A3411). If there is no input to the upper grand prize opening switch 2 (the result of A3411 is "N
”), and the process proceeds to step A3415. If there is an input to the upper large winning opening switch 2 (result of A3411 is "Y"), a large winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3412) in order to perform a winning effect, and the effect command setting process is executed. (A341
3), the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3414).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning counter is 0 (A3415).
If the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3415 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the processing for remaining balls in the big winning opening is in progress (A3416). If the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3416 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the minor winning remaining ball processing is being performed (A3417). If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3417 is "N"), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2 here) is added to the big winning opening count (A3418).

On the other hand, if the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3415 is "Y
”), when the big winning opening remaining balls are being processed (the result of A3416 is "Y"), or when the minor winning opening remaining balls are being processed (the result of A3417 is "Y"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process exit.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the large winning hole count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (e.g., 9 in terms of the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (A3419), and determines whether or not the large winning hole count number is less than the upper limit (the result of A3419 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the large winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3419 is "Y"), the large winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (A3420), and the target special game processing timer area is set to 0
Clear (A3421).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot is open (A3422).
If it is not open for a big hit (the result of A3422 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the jackpot is being opened (result of A3422 is "Y"), the value for ending the jackpot opening operation is saved in the jackpot opening control pointer area (A3423), and then the jackpot switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3208) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start to vary (A3501). If the special figure 1 variation display game cannot start the variation (if the variation cannot be started) (the result of A3501 is "N"), special figure 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM
The normal processing number "0" is saved (A3502). It should be noted that here, from the end of the special figure 2 variation display game jackpot variation (during the special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 2 jackpot end processing), and the small of the special figure 2 variation display game From the end of the hit variation (during special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the small hit operation (special figure 2 small hit end processing), the special figure 1 variation display game is not allowed to start variation.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can start fluctuation (A3501
(A3503). If the left-handed instruction notification command is already prepared as a production command and transmitted to the production control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction has been notified. If left-handed instruction has been notified (A35
03 result is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3507.

If the game control device 100 has not notified the left-handed instruction (the result of A3503 is "N")
A left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A3504), effect command setting processing is executed (A3505), and a left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like. A flag is set (A3506).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3507)
. If the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (the result of A3507 is "Y"), save the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3502). Thereby, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reservations becomes 1 or more.

Game control device 100, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (the result of A3507 is "N"),
A variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A3508), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3509
). Subsequently, a special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A
3510). After that, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number as a production command (A3511), and execute production command setting processing (A3512).

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area in RWM (information addition) (A3513). Here, in the special figure status area, during the special figure 1 fluctuation, or (during special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) information will be set. Next, it is determined whether the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A3514), and if it is not in a high probability state (
If it is in a low-probability state) (the result of A3514 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in a high-probability final fluctuation (A3515). Whether or not it is during the high-probability final fluctuation can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag, which will be described later.

If the game control device 100 is not in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3515 is "N"),
The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A3516), and the special figure 1 fluctuation process transition setting process is executed (A3517). It should be noted that the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is used in the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A3514 is "Y"),
Or, if it is during the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3515 is "Y"), without setting the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag, execute the special figure 1 fluctuation process transition setting process (A3517).

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start to fluctuate (A3601). If the special figure 2 variation display game cannot start variation (if the variation cannot be started) (the result of A3601 is "N"), special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM
The normal processing number "0" is saved (A3602). In addition, here, from the end of the special figure 1 variation display game jackpot variation (during special figure 1 display processing) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 1 jackpot end processing), and the special figure 1 variation display game small From the end of the hit variation (during special figure 1 display processing) to the end of the small winning operation (special figure 1 small winning end processing), the special figure 2 variation display game cannot start variation.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start fluctuation (A3601
(A3602). If the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (the result of A3602 is "N"), prepare the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as a production command (A3603
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3604). Subsequently, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for starting the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3605).

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area in RWM (information addition) (A3606). Here, in the special figure status area, during the special figure 2 fluctuation, or (during special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) information will be set. Next, it is determined whether the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A3607), and if it is not in a high probability state (
If it is in a low-probability state) (the result of A3607 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in a high-probability final fluctuation (A3608). Whether or not it is during the high-probability final fluctuation can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag, which will be described later.

If the game control device 100 is not in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3608 is "N"),
Set the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (A3609), and execute the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process (A3610). It should be noted that the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is used in the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A3614 is "Y"),
Or, if it is during the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3615 is "Y"), without setting the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag, execute the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process (A3617).

Game control device 100, if the special figure 2 pending number is 0 (the result of A3602 is "Y"),
It is determined whether the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (A3611). If the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (
The result of A3611 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (A3612). If the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A3612 is "N"
), and it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3613). If the customer waiting demonstration has not started (the result of A3613 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set (A3614).
.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3615), and executes effect command setting processing (A3616).
The production control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demonstration command can execute the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41. - 特許庁After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3617). Thereby, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (the result of A3611 is "N"), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game will be executed, so without preparing the customer waiting demo command, the RWM special Figure 2
The special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is saved in the game processing number area (A3617). Also, if the special figure 1 is fluctuating (the result of A3612 is "Y"), or if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3613 is "Y"), prepare a customer waiting demo command, etc. RWM
Save the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A3617).

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. Figure 37 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3701). In addition, the special figure 1 information setting flag is for setting the variation information (including the sorting of the prefetch variation pattern
), etc. Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process (A3
702), special figure 1 stop design setting process related to setting of special figure 1 stop design (design information) (A370
3), special figure 1 information setting processing (A3704) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3705 ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3706) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation start information setting process for setting the information of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game ( A3707) is executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of winning is in a high probability state (that is, variable probability state) (A3708). If it is not in a high probability state (the result of A3708 is "N")
, whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (A3709). If it is not during the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3709 is "N"), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed) (A3710).

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 is fluctuating (result of A3710 is "Y"), determines whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3711). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3711 is "Y"), that is, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is within the time value of the special figure 2 game processing timer If so, the process proceeds to step A3714.

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 (A3
711 result is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 as the predetermined number
It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied (A3712). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is less than a predetermined number (here 4) (the result of A3712 is "N"), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated (A3713). The remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated by the value of (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area + the number of repetitions x 60000 msec).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3714). (
The result of A3714 is "N"), prepare a command to notify that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as a production command (
A3715), effect command setting processing is executed (A3716). When the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is equal to or longer than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a small hit or the like, the special figure 1 variation display is displayed on the display device 41. There is a possibility that the production related to the game ends suddenly. Therefore, the effect control device 300 that has received the above command sets (changes) the effect related to the decoration special figure 1 variable display game to, for example, not flashy so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, the game control device 100 changes the number of fluctuations of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started in the high probability state (
Remaining number of times) Execute high probability fluctuation number update processing to update and manage (A3717), and end special figure 1 fluctuation start processing.

On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (the result of A3708 is "Y"), if it is in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3709 is "Y"), if the special figure 2 is not fluctuating (the result of A3710 is "
N"), the process of steps A3711 to A3716 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A3717.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is a predetermined number (here, 4) or more (the result of A3712 is "Y"), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (240 (= 4 × 60) seconds or more here) is longer than the longest variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, so the command to notify that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is longer is not prepared, the process proceeds to step A3717.

Furthermore, the game control device 100, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3714 is "Y"), the special figure 1 variation display game Step A37 without preparing a command notifying that the fluctuation time of is longer
17 is processed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3605) in special figure 2 normal processing will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3801). In addition, the special figure 2 information setting flag is for setting the variation information (including the sorting of the prefetch variation pattern
), etc. Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process (A3
802), special figure 2 stop design setting process (A380
3), special figure 2 information setting processing (A3804) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3805 ). Subsequently, the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (A3806) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation start information setting process for setting the information of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game ( A3807), high probability fluctuation number update processing for updating and managing the number of fluctuations (remaining number) of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state (A3808), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3702) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 39A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 1 area of RWM (
A3901a), saving deviation information in RWM jackpot flag 1 area (A3902a
). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A3903a). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904a).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big win flag 2 indicates a big win, that is, whether or not the big win information is saved in the big win flag 2 area (A3905a). If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3905a is "N"), a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the acquired big hit random number value (A
3906a), it is determined whether or not the result of determination is a big hit (A3907a). If the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3907a is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3902a (A3908a
), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. Only when the big win flag 2 is not a big win, the big win flag 1 can become a big win (the big win information is saved in the big win flag 1 area), so that the big win flag 1 and the big win flag 2 can be prevented from becoming a big win at the same time. .

If the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3905a is "
Y"), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907a is "N"), based on the acquired big hit random number value, whether the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit A small hit determination process for determining whether or not is executed (A3909a), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (A3910a). In addition, in this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the judgment of the small hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the judgment of the small hit and the judgment of the big hit).
. If the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A3910a is "Y"), save the small hit information by overwriting the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3901a (A3911a), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. When the special figure 1 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910a is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3802) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 39B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, the "small hit flag 1" in the big hit flag 1 setting process (Fig. 39A) is changed to the "small hit flag 2", the "big hit flag 1" is changed to the "big hit flag 2", and the "big hit flag 2". is replaced with "big hit flag 1", and "special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2", and since the same processing as the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed, detailed description is omitted. note that,
Steps A3901b-A3911b in the big hit flag 2 setting process respectively correspond to steps A3901a-A3911a in the big hit flag 1 setting process.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (
A3906a, A3906b) will be described in detail. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes performed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in step A3103 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A4001), and judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A4002). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

Game control device 100, when the target jackpot random number value is less than the lower limit judgment value (A400
The result of 2 is "Y"), set a failure (other than a big hit) as the judgment result (A4007), and finish the big hit judgment process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A4
The result of 002 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A40).
03). Then, if it is in a high probability state (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value for middle high probability is set (A4004). On the other hand, if it is not in a high probability state (the result of A4003 is "N"), the upper limit determination value for low probability is set (A4005).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A4006). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), the decision result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A4007). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A4006 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, small hit determination processing (
A3909a, A3909b) will be described in detail. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3107 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit.

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In addition, in this embodiment,
Although the small hit random number is not provided uniquely and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit, it is also possible to provide the unique small hit random number.

Game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A
The result of 4101 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the determination result (A4106), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A4101 is "N"), determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. (A4102). Then, when the information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4102 is "Y"), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A4103). On the other hand, if the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A4104).

After setting the small hit upper limit determination value, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit determination value (A4105). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4105 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the judgment result (A4106). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A41
05 result is "N"), a small hit is set as the determination result (A4107). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is terminated.

FIG. 42 shows the big hit probability (the probability that the judgment result will be a big hit), the small hit probability (the probability that the judgment result will be a small hit), and the loss probability (the judgment result will be a loss). Probability) is shown for the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. FIG. 42(a) shows the probabilities in the low-probability state, and FIG. 42(b) shows the probabilities in the high-probability state.

In this embodiment, the jackpot probability (jackpot occurrence probability) is higher in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. Small hit probability (occurrence probability of small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. The loss probability (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state.

Also, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 2 variation display game. , and the probability of losing is lower than that of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (in the high probability state, the probability of loss of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is 0). Therefore, since winning to the second starting winning port 37 is more advantageous to the player than winning to the first starting winning port 36 (especially with respect to the small hit probability), the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is executed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 5, 6A, and 6B, the jackpot pattern is only a variable probability pattern, and after the jackpot state (special game state) ends, it becomes a high probability state (variable probability state) without exception,
The probability variable inrush rate is 100%. In addition, the high probability state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 5
0 times) is continued until the variable display game starts.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4301a). If the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A4301a is "Y"), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4302a). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (A4303a), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design save area of RWM (A4304a). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A43
05a), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306a). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area of RWM (A4307a), and the big win corresponding to the stop symbol number. Acquire the mouth opening information and save it in the special figure 1 big winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4308a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a. These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4301a is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit, that is, if the small hit flag 1 area contains the small hit information. It is determined whether it has been saved (A4309a). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A4309a is "Y"), the small hit design random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (A4310a). Next, a special figure 1 small hit design table is set (A4311a), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design save area (A4312a). This process selects the type of specific result. Subsequently, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4313a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

The game control device 100, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (the result of A4309a is "
N"), save the stop design number at the time of loss in the special figure 1 stop design save area (A4314a)
, the lost stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4315a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

After steps A4308a, A4313a, and A4315a, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4316a). It should be noted that the stop design pattern is the missing design of FIG.
16R probability variation A1, 16R probability variation B1-B3), and corresponds to one of the small hit pattern (special figure 1 small hit). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 displays a decoration special figure 1 command as a production command.
Save in the command area (A4317a), and execute effect command setting processing (A431
8a). A decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319a), and sets the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0.
Clear (A4320a), 0 clear (
A4321a). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the "small hit flag 1" in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (Fig. 43A) is changed to the "small hit flag 2", the "big hit flag 1" is changed to the "big hit flag 2", and the " Special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2", and since the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process is performed, detailed description is omitted. In addition, step A4 in the special figure 2 stop design setting process
301b-A4321b, respectively, step A43 in the special figure 1 stop design setting process
01a-A4321a.

It should be noted that the stop design pattern set in the special figure 2 stop design setting process is the lost design of FIG. 6A, FIG. F3), and corresponds to one of a plurality of small hit patterns (special figure 2 small hit 1-3). By the above processing, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening 36, and the game ball at the second starting winning opening 37 It constitutes a variable display game executing means for executing a special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4401). If it is not in a high probability state (if it is in a low probability state) (the result of A4401 is "N"), a fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (A4402). Then, the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 are acquired (A4403).

Here, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation. The first half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of reach,
The second half variation is a variation mode after reaching the reach state, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4404), and if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is "N"). ), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit (A4405
).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit, the game control device 100 (A4405
The result is "Y"), in order to distribute the second half fluctuation according to the number of special figures 1 reservation, add the number of special figures 1 reservation to the second half offset data and update the value (A4406), depending on the number of special figures 1 reservation In order to distribute the first half fluctuation, add the special figure 1 reservation number to the first half offset data and convert the value (A
4407). If the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a small hit (if lost) (A44
The result of 05 is "N"), step A4406 is not processed, and the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reservation number only to the first half offset data (A4407).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 (A4404
result is "Y"), the processing of steps A4405-A4407 is not performed, and step A440
The first half offset data and second half offset data acquired in 3 are not updated or converted, and the process proceeds to step A4412.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A4401 is "Y"),
It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4408). If the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (result of A4408 is "N"), special figure 1 at high probability
Set the first half offset data for the loss/small hit (A4409), step A441
Move to the process of 1. If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4408 is "Y"), set the first half offset data for the special figure 1 big hit at a high probability (A44
10). Subsequently, the second half offset data for long-time variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A4411). As a result, in the high probability state, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a long-time variation.

After steps A4404, A4407, or A4411, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the RWM fluctuation distribution information 1 area (A4
412), save the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) in the RWM fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4413), and end the special figure 1 information setting process.

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4501). If it is in a high probability state (the result of A4501 is "N"), the variation pattern selection information table is set (A4502). Then, the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 are acquired (A4503). The first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state) (A450
The result of 1 is "N"), and it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (A4
504). If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4504 is "N"
), and set the first half offset data for the special figure 2 loss/small hit at low probability (A4505
), the process proceeds to step A4507. When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4504 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at the time of low probability is set (A4506). Subsequently, the second half offset data for long-time variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A4507). Thereby, in the low probability state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a long fluctuation (long fluctuation).

After step A4503 or A4507, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the RWM fluctuation distribution information 1 area (A4508), and saves the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2). Save in RWM fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A450
9), end the special figure 2 information setting process.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3706) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group address table (A4601)
, acquires and prepares the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 (A
4602), the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded as a random number from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 and prepared (A4603).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a loss (A4604). If the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is lost (the result of A4604 is "Y"), execute 2-byte distribution processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (A460
5) If the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a loss (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (A
The result of 4604 is "N"), and the sorting process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4
606).

The structure of the second-half variation group table is different for winning and for losing. The size of the random number for distribution is 1 byte for winning and 2 bytes for losing. The size of the hit is set to 1 byte in order to save the data capacity, but since the appearance rate of the hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, even 1 byte is sufficient. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big win or a small win), only the lower value of the variation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605 or A4606, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the allocation (A4607). continue,
Variation pattern random number 2 as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of Toku-zu 1
is loaded and prepared (A4608), and sorting processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609). Then, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (A4610). Through the above processing, the second half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4611), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation allocation information 1 and the second half variation number (A4612). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4613). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of special figure 1 is prepared by loading the fluctuation pattern random number 3 as a random number (A4614), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of being distributed,
Save in the first half variation number area (A4616), and end the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.
By the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (A3806) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the second half variation selection address table (A4701)
, acquires and prepares the address of the second half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 (A4
702). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 (A4703), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4704). Then, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (A4705). Through the above processing, the second half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4706), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4707). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4708). Furthermore, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of the special figure 2 (A4709), and the sorting process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4710).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of being distributed,
Save in the first half variation number area (A4711), and end the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.
By the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4605) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the second half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4801), It is determined whether or not the code is unsorted (A480
2).

Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but the second half that defines only the second half fluctuation pattern group in which the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" Since there is no need for sorting in the variation group table (for example, some variation group tables when the result is a loss), a sorting value of "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting, is defined at the top. .

Then, the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the result of allocation when the top data of the second half variation group table is a code without allocation (the result of A4802 is "Y") (A4807). ), ending the 2-byte allocation process.

On the other hand, if the head data of the second half fluctuation group table is not a code of no sorting (the result of A4802 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines one sorting value initially specified in the second half fluctuation group table. (A4803).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value obtained in the process of step A4803 from the random number (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) loaded in the process of step A4603 of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. A new random number value is calculated (A4804). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4805).

If the new random number value is not smaller than "0", the game control device 100 (A4805
result is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4806), step A
The processing after 4803 is executed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is obtained (A4803), the determined random value in the process of step A4805 is used as a new random value, and the distribution value is subtracted. (A480
4). Then, each process is executed for the calculated new random number value until it is determined in step A4805 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4805 is "Y"). As a result, any one second half variation selection table is selected from at least one second half variation selection table defined in the second half variation group table.

Then, if the new random number value is smaller than "0", the game control device 100 (A48
05 result is "Y"), and updated to the data address corresponding to the sorted result (A480
7) End the 2-byte allocation process.

[Distribution process]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (A4606, A4609, A4615, A4704, A4710) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sorting processing. The distribution process is
Select the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or select the special figure variation display from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 Select the second half variation pattern of the game, or based on the variation pattern random number 3, the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group)
It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from.

Game control device 100, first, prepared second half variation group table (selection table)
, check whether the leading data of the second half fluctuation selection table (selection table) or the first half fluctuation selection table (selection table) is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A49
01), it is determined whether or not the code is unsorted (A4902).

Here, like the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern and first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table without
, that is, a code without sorting is specified at the top.

Then, the game control device 100, when the head data of the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (A490
2 is "Y"), and updated to the data address corresponding to the sorted result (A4907).
), ending the sorting process.

On the other hand, if the leading data of the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is not a code without sorting, the game control device 100 (A4902
result is "N"), one distribution value initially specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is acquired (A4903).

Subsequently, the game control device 100, the loaded random number (variation pattern random number 1-3 value)
to calculate a new random number value (A
4904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4905).

If the new random number value is not smaller than "0", the game control device 100 (A4905
result is "N"), update to the address of the next distribution value (A4906), step A49
03 and subsequent steps are executed. That is, the distribution values specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are acquired (A4903), and the random number determined in step A4905 is used as a new random number, and the distribution value is set. Subtraction is performed, and a new random number value is calculated (A4904). Then, it is executed until it is determined that the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one of the second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the second half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table.

Then, if the new random number value is smaller than "0", the game control device 100 (A49
05 is "Y"), and updated to the data address corresponding to the sorted result (A490
7) Terminate the sorting process.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A3
707, A3807) will be described in detail. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (A5001). If you are setting information about the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A5
The result of 001 is "Y"), and the random number storage area (for holding ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 used is cleared (A5002). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A5001 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, so the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to 3 of the special figure 2 used Clear storage area (A500
3).

After steps A5002 and A5003, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation time value table (A5004), and acquires the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number (A50
05). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A5006), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is obtained (A5007).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A500
8), save the added value in the target special game processing timer area (A5009). continue,
It is determined whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A5010). If the information is not set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5010 is "N"), special figure 2
Since the information is being set for the variable display game, it is determined whether or not to start the long variation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5011).

If the game control device 100 does not start the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (A5011
result is "N"), save 0 in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A50
12), when starting the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5011 is "Y"),
9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5013). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variable display game, in order to change the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not enough with a 2-byte timer, the predetermined number of repetitions (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to the number of repetitions. set in the area. In timer interrupt processing with an interrupt period of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, 60000 ms by saving the above additional value to the special game processing timer area
If a timer of ec (60 seconds) is set and a further 9 iterations are saved,
Timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2 game processing (Fig. 33)) continues to subtract the timer (A3
303), when time is up (result of A3304 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3306), and 60000 ms (60 seconds), which is a long fluctuation timer value, is set in the game processing timer. As a result, the long fluctuation special figure 2 fluctuation display game, 60000 msec
+(60000 msec x 9) = 10 minutes long variation time.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when it is not a long fluctuation (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5009 It is the sum of the time value and the second half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variation display game (A50
10 result is "Y"), step A5014 without setting the number of repetitions of the timer
transition to

After steps A5010, A5012 and A5013, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5014) and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5015). . Then, an effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5016).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (A5017). If you are setting information about the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A5
The result of 017 is "Y"), the special figure 1 pending number is updated by -1 (A5018), the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are shifted (A5019), and the free space after the shift is cleared (A5020). If you are not setting information about the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A5017
The result is "N"), and information is being set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, so without shifting the contents of the random number storage area (because the special figure 1 pending number is 1), the fluctuation start information setting process is performed. finish.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Variation commands including information about patterns are mentioned, and these commands are sent to the production control device 300 . In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[High-probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, high probability fluctuation number update processing (A
3717, A3808) will be described in detail. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the procedure of high-probability variation frequency update processing. In the high-probability fluctuation number update process, the number of fluctuations of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high-probability state (here, the number of high-probability fluctuations as the number of remaining fluctuations) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A5101). If it is not in the high probability state (if it is in the low probability state) (the result of A5101 is "N"), the high probability fluctuation frequency update process is terminated.

When the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, it becomes a low probability state (it can be set to a low probability state by the fanfare/interval process transition setting process described later). That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, not only the special figure 1 variation display game but also the special figure 2 variation display game is executed in a low probability state, and when the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, especially Not only the FIG. 2 variation display game but also the special figure 1 variation display game are executed in a low probability state. In addition, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit,
There is a possibility of a high probability state, and the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed in a high probability state.

If the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A5101 is "Y"), -1 updates the high probability fluctuation count indicating the remaining number of special figure fluctuation display games to be started in the high probability state (
subtract 1) (A5102). In addition, the initial value of the number of high probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high probability state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process described later) ). Also, even if any of the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game starts to fluctuate, the high probability variation frequency is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A51
03). When the high probability variation count is not 0 (the result of A5103 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the high probability variation count update process is terminated. If the number of times of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (result of A5103 is "Y"), the signal related to the end of high-probability (off data of 2 jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area of RWM (A5104). Furthermore, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5105). Signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are, for example, off data of special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 2 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation This is OFF data of the time shortening state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the RWM gaming state display number area (A5106), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM ( A5107), to set the high probability final variation flag corresponding to the pattern (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start the variation (A5108), and end the high probability variation number update process.

Note that the high-probability final fluctuation flag is information for indicating that the fluctuation started during a high probability even if the probability is currently low. In the high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation), if the probability is not lowered to low probability immediately after the fluctuation starts, the hit judgment due to the start-up winning during this final fluctuation will be performed with high probability. Therefore, the hit probability is set to a low probability by the special low probability & no time saving flag at the start of the fluctuation of the high probability final fluctuation. Therefore, a high-probability final change flag is set and used to determine whether it is a high-probability final change (for example, step A2714
, A3515, A3608, A3709, etc.). Also, the high probability final change flag is
It also includes information that can determine whether it is a high probability final variation of special figure 1 or special figure 2.

As described above, after the jackpot ends, the high probability state is a predetermined number of times (the initial value of the high probability fluctuation frequency,
For example, 50 times) is maintained until the variable display game is started, and when the high probability variation number = 0 and the predetermined number of variable display games (high probability final variation) is started, special low probability & no time saving A flag is set, the time saving state ends while becoming a low probability state, and a high probability final variation flag is set.

[Special figure 1 change process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process shift setting process (A3517) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 52A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process.

Game control device 100, first, as the processing number in order to shift to the process during special figure 1 fluctuation
” (A5201a), and save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5
202a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (A5203a), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 1 (ON data of the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5204a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A5205a). Subsequently, save the initial value (e.g. 100 msec) of the flashing control timer (blinking period timer of the special figure 1 indicator 51) in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (A5206
a), Save the initial value of the changing pattern number (for example, 0 indicating the non-lighting pattern in FIG. 5) in the special figure 1 changing pattern number area (A5207a), and end the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process do.

[Special figure 2 change process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (A3610) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 52B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process.

The special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process is the special figure 1 fluctuation process transition setting process (Fig. 52A) in which "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) is replaced with "special figure 2" (special symbol 2) , and since the same processing as the processing shift setting processing during special figure 1 fluctuation is performed, detailed description is omitted. note that,
Steps A5201b-A5207b in the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process respectively correspond to steps A5201a-A5207a in the special figure 1 fluctuation process transition setting process.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuating process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 during fluctuation processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of output times of symbol determination by +1 (A5301).
The output number of times of symbol determination is used in the later-described symbol determination number signal editing process. Next, load the decoration special figure 1 command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepare it as a production command (A5
302), effect command setting processing is executed (A5303). After that, prepare a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game as a production command (A5
304), effect command setting processing is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (high-probability final variation) (A5306). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation frequency updating process, it can be determined that the final fluctuation is high-probability fluctuation. If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is a high probability final fluctuation (A530
The result of 6 is "Y"), the display time corresponding to the stop pattern pattern of special figure 1 is set as the display time of the stop symbol of special figure 1 (stop display time) (A5307). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 ms if the stop symbol pattern is the missing symbol of special figure 1.
c, 2000 msec for special 1 jackpot pattern, 136 for special 1 small hit pattern
msec.

The game control device 100, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is not the high probability final fluctuation (
The result of A5306 is "N"), as the display time of special figure 1, set the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation (A5308). For example, the display time for the high-probability final change is 7000 msec.

After steps A5307 and A5308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a loss (A5309). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is lost (the result of A5309 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is changed to the special figure 1 stop symbol Load from the save area and special figure 1
Save in the stop symbol area (A5324).

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not lost (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A5309 is "N"), the special figure 2 is also fluctuating (the special figure 2 variation display game is also execution) (A5310). If the special figure 2 is not fluctuating (A53
10 result is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5320. If the special figure 2 is also fluctuating (the result of A5310 is "Y"), it is determined whether the later-described special figure 2 displaying process is in progress (A5311).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5311 is "
Y"), and the process proceeds to step A5313. If the special figure 2 display process is not running (
The result of A5311 is "N"), and the design fixed number output number is updated by +1 (A5312). Subsequently, set the display time of the value obtained by adding 4msec to the display time of special figure 1 as the display time of special figure 2 (display time of special figure 1 + 4msec) (A5313), and display it in the special figure 2 game processing timer area Save time (A5314). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason for adding 4msec is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game process (subtraction of 4msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) (A3303), which is added extra. Thereby, the actual display time of the stop pattern of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop pattern of the special figure 2 can be made the same. In addition, if you have already started the stop display of special figure 2, the display time will be reset here (basically the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the losing pattern command of the decoration special figure 2 as an effect command (A5315), and executes the effect command setting process (A5316). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5317), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5318). After that, execute special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 to set for executing special figure 2 display process (
A5319).

By the processing of steps A5313 to A5319, in the special figure 1 fluctuation process which is the control related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is set. , Execution of special figure 2 display processing (end of special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (during the special figure 2 variation), if the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 2 variation display game will be forcibly terminated (forcibly terminated) due to a deviation result.

It should be noted that the special figure 1 variable process, when the fluctuation time ends, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5009) times up (of A3204 Since the result is "Y"), when the special figure 1 variation display game of the winning result stops variation, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 1 command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saves it in the winning design command area (A5320). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (A5321). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5321 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern setting process (stop pattern number at the time of a small hit) is saved in the special figure 1 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a small hit (if it is a big hit) (the result of A5321 is "N"), the game control device 100 changes the number of rounds from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area to the round number upper limit. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5322),
The special prize opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5323). After that, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324). Next, the special figure 1 display during processing transition setting processing 1 which sets for executing the special figure 1 display processing is executed (A5325), and the special figure 1 changing processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variation display game (while the special figure 2 is varying)
Even so, when the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a winning result, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly terminated with a losing result.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. Figure 54 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 2 change.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of output times of design determination by +1 (A5401).
The output number of times of symbol determination is used in the later-described symbol determination number signal editing process. Next, load the decoration special figure 2 command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepare it as a production command (A5
402), effect command setting processing is executed (A5403). After that, prepare a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game as a production command (A5
404), effect command setting processing is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (high-probability final variation) (A5406). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation frequency updating process, it can be determined that the final fluctuation is high-probability fluctuation. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to start is not a high probability final fluctuation (A540
The result of 6 is "N"), and the display time corresponding to the stop pattern pattern of special figure 2 is set as the display time (stop display time) of the special figure 2 (A5407). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop design pattern is 600 ms if the stop design pattern is the missing design of the special figure 2.
c, 600 msec for special 2 big hit pattern, 600 m for special 2 small hit pattern
sec. In addition, the display time of the winning design of the special figure 2, the big hit design, and the small hit design is the same.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is a high probability final fluctuation (
The result of A5406 is "Y"), as the display time of special figure 2, set the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation (A5408). For example, the display time for the high-probability final change is 7000 msec.

After steps A5407 and A5408, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss (A5409). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is lost (the result of A5409 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop design setting process (stop design number at the time of loss) is set to the special figure 2 stop design Load from the save area and special figure 2
Save in the stop symbol area (A5424).

If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not lost (A5410
The result is "N"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is also fluctuating (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is also being executed) (A5410). When special figure 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A5410 is "N"), it moves to the processing of step A5420. If special figure 1 is also fluctuating (the result of A5410 is "Y
”), It is determined whether or not special figure 1 displaying process described later is being executed (A5411).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5411 is "
Y"), and the process proceeds to step A5413. If special figure 1 display processing is not in progress (
The result of A5411 is "N"), and the design fixed number output number is updated by +1 (A5412). Subsequently, set the display time of the value (display time of special figure 2 + 4msec) obtained by adding 4msec to the display time of special figure 2 as the display time of special figure 1 (A5413), and display it in the special figure 1 game processing timer area Save time (A5414). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason for adding 4msec is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game process (subtraction of 4msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) (A3203), which is added extra. Thereby, the display time of the stop design of the actual special figure 2 and the display time of the stop design of the special figure 1 can be made the same. In addition, if you have already started the stop display of special figure 1, the display time will be reset here (basically the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the losing pattern command of the decoration special figure 1 as a production command (A5415), and executes production command setting processing (A5416). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5417), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5418). After that, execute special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 to set for executing special figure 1 displaying process (
A5419).

By the processing of steps A5413 to A5419, in the special figure 2 fluctuation processing which is the control related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is set. , Execution of special figure 1 display processing (end of special figure 1 fluctuation display game)
is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (during the special figure 1 variation), if the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 1 variation display game will be forcibly terminated (execution terminated) as a result of deviation.

It should be noted that the special figure 2 fluctuation process, when the fluctuation time ends, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3304 and A3305 is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 2 variation display game of the hit result stops variation, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly ended in variation (execution end).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 2 command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saves it in the winning design command area (A5420). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (A5421). If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A5421 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern setting process (stop pattern number at the time of a small hit) is saved in the special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (if it is a big hit) (the result of A5421 is "N"), the game control device 100 changes the round number upper limit from the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5422),
The special prize opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5423). After that, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424). Next, execute the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1 to set for executing the special figure 2 displaying process (A5425), and end the special figure 2 changing process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variation display game (during special figure 1 variation)
Even so, when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly terminated with a losing result.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1 (A5325) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 55A is a flow chart showing a procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during special figure 1 display.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "2
” (A5501a), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A55
02a), the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (off data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503a).

Next, the game control device 100, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, sets the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 indicator 51 to the special figure 1 variation control flag Save to the area (A5504a), to end the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the processing shift setting process 1 (A5425) during special figure 2 display in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 display.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "2
” (A5501b), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A55
02b), the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (off data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503b).

Next, the game control device 100, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 special figure 2 fluctuation control flag Save in the area (A5504b), and end the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 display.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the processing shift setting process 2 (A5419) during special figure 1 display in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 56A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, information setting is performed when the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly terminated due to the hit of the special figure 2 variation display game.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "2
” (A5601a), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A56
(A5
603a). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (A5604a ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the lost stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605a), clears the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (A5606a),
Clear the special figure 1 big winning opening information area (A5607a). Furthermore, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (A5608a), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A5609a). Subsequently, clear the special figure 1 stop pattern save area (A5610a),
Save the stop pattern number (stop pattern number at the time of loss) in the special figure 1 stop pattern area (A
5611a). By the above processing, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 becomes a fluctuation stop (variation end) with the stop symbol of the loss.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 (A5319) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 56B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 2 display. In the special figure 2 display process shift setting process 2, information setting is performed when the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly terminated due to the hit of the special figure 1 variation display game.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "2
” (A5601b), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A56
(A5
603b). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (A5604b ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the deviation stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605b), clears the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (A5606b),
Clear the special figure 2 big winning opening information area (A5607b). Furthermore, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A5608b), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A5609b). Subsequently, clear the special figure 2 stop pattern evacuation area (A5610b),
Save the stop pattern number (stop pattern number at the time of loss) in the special figure 2 stop pattern area (A
5611b). By the above processing, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 becomes a fluctuation stop (variation end) with the stop symbol of the deviation.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. Figures 57A and 57B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the process during special figure 1 display. Figure 57A shows the first half of the process during special figure 1 display, Figure 57B shows the second half of the process during special figure 1 display.

The game control device 100, first, from the small hit flag 1 area small hit flag 1 (small hit information,
Or, showing the loss information) is loaded (A5701), and the small hit flag 1 area is cleared (A5702). Subsequently, from the jackpot flag 1 area to the jackpot flag 1 (jackpot information, or
showing loss information) (A5703), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (A5
704). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5705).

If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 (A5705
result is "Y"), the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5706). For example, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 jackpot is the ON data of the conditional device operating signal, the ON data of the character product continuous operating device operating signal, and the ON data of the special symbol 1 winning signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5708).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the round number upper limit table (A5709), and sets the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit table. Acquire and save in the RWM round number upper limit area (A5
710). Note that the upper limit of the number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information of the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is obtained from the round number upper limit table and saved in the RWM round LED pointer area (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5712), and executes the effect command setting process (A57
13). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this winning design command corresponds to a big winning design. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5714), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5715).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the big winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the probability state in the external information output data area (A5716). The signals here are, for example, a big win 2 signal and a big win 3 signal that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on for jackpots other than 2R, turned on for high-probability 2R jackpots, turned off for low-probability 2R jackpots,
The jackpot 3 signal is turned on for a jackpot other than 2R, turned off for a high-probability 2R jackpot, and turned on for a low-probability 2R jackpot.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (A5717), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5718). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot of opening the upper big winning opening based on the big winning opening opening information (A5719).

If the game control device 100 is a big hit with the opening of the upper special prize opening (the result of A5719 is "Y
”), clear the number of fraudulent winnings area of the upper grand prize opening (A5720), save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the flag area of the upper special winning mouth fraudulent winning period of RWM (A5721), fanfare /
"3" is set as the processing number to shift to the processing during the interval (A5724).
If it is not a big hit when the upper big winning opening is opened (the result of A5719 is "N"), clear the lower big winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5722), and put the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5723), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to fanfare/interval processing (A5724).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5
725), execute the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (A5726),
End the special figure 1 displaying process.

On the other hand, if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (A5
The result of 705 is "N"), based on the small hit flag 1, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit) ( A5727). When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A5727 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5728). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time is a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5728 is "Y
'), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5729), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5730).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the RWM power failure restoration transmission command area (A5731), and clears the left hitting instruction notification flag (A57
32). The transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery. After that, the winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and the effect command setting process is executed (A57
34). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit, this winning design command corresponds to a small winning design. On the other hand, if the current special figure 1 variation display game is not the high probability final variation (the result of A5728 is "N"), the game control device 100 moves from step A5729 to A
Without performing the process of 5732, the winning design command is loaded from the winning design command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5734).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small winning fanfare command as a production command (A5735), and executes production command setting processing (A5736). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A5737). If it is not a high-probability state (
The result of A5737 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5738), and the second game state informing that it is right-handed. In order to turn off the display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area of RWM (A5739). If it is in a high-probability state (the result of A5737 is "Y"), the signal related to the right-handed instruction (ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5740), indicating that it is right-handed. In order to light up the second game state display section 56 (lamps D8 to D10) for informing the player, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5741).

After steps A5739 and A5741, the game control device 100 clears the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5742), saves the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5743), Execute special figure 1 small per fanfare middle process shift setting process (A5744), and end the special figure 1 display process.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a small hit (if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit) (the result of A5727 is "N"), that is, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game If the result of is lost, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5745). If it is not a high-probability final change (the result of A5745 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5753.

If the game control device 100 is a high probability final variation (the result of A5745 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5746), and executes the effect command setting process (A5747). . Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5748), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A57
49). After that, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A5750
). If it is a small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5750 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A5753.

If the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5750 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5
751). Subsequently, the second game state display section 56 (lamp D8
-D10), save the number in the left-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5752), and clear the special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5
753). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is lost, the special figure 1 normal processing transition setting process 1 is executed (A5754), and the special figure 1 displaying process is ended. In the special figure 1 normal processing transition setting process 1, "0" is set as the processing number to switch to the special figure 1 normal processing, and processing such as saving the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area is performed.

[Special figure 2 display process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. Figures 58A and 58B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the process during special figure 2 display. Figure 58A shows the first half of the process during special figure 2 display, Figure 58B shows the second half of the process during special figure 2 display.

The game control device 100, first, from the small hit flag 2 area small hit flag 2 (small hit information,
Or, showing the loss information) is loaded (A5801), and the small hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5802). Subsequently, from the jackpot flag 2 area to the jackpot flag 2 (jackpot information, or
(A5803) and clear the jackpot flag 2 area (A5
804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 (A5805
result is "Y"), the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5806). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is the ON data of the conditional device operating signal, the ON data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the ON data of the special symbol 2 winning signal. Subsequently, special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is prepared as production command (A5807), production command setting processing is executed (A5808).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the round number upper limit table (A5809), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit table Acquire and save in the RWM round number upper limit area (A5
810). Note that the upper limit of the number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information of the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is obtained from the round number upper limit table and saved in the RWM round LED pointer area (A5811).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5812), and executes the effect command setting process (A58
13). In addition, since the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big win, this winning design command corresponds to a big winning design. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5814), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5815).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability in the external information output data area (A5816). The signals here are, for example, a big win 2 signal and a big win 3 signal that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on for jackpots other than 2R, turned on for high-probability 2R jackpots, turned off for low-probability 2R jackpots,
The jackpot 3 signal is turned on for a jackpot other than 2R, turned off for a high-probability 2R jackpot, and turned on for a low-probability 2R jackpot.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (A5817), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5818). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big win of opening the upper big winning opening based on the big winning opening opening information (A5819).

If the game control device 100 is a jackpot with the opening of the upper special prize opening (the result of A5819 is "Y
”), clear the number of fraudulent winnings area of the upper grand prize opening (A5820), save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the flag area of the upper special winning mouth fraudulent winning period of RWM (A5821), fanfare /
"3" is set as the processing number to shift to the processing during the interval (A5824).
If it is not a big hit when the upper big winning opening is opened (the result of A5819 is "N"), clear the lower big winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5822), and put the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5823), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to fanfare/interval processing (A5824).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5
825), execute fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (A5826),
End the special figure 2 displaying process.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (A5
The result of 805 is "N"), based on the small hit flag 2, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) ( A5827). If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A5827 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5828). If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time is a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5828 is "Y
'), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5829), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5830).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the RWM power failure restoration transmission command area (A5831), and clears the left hitting instruction notification flag (A58
32). After that, the winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5834). note that,
Since the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, this hit design command corresponds to a small hit design. On the other hand, if the current special figure 2 variation display game is not the high probability final variation (the result of A5828 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not process steps A5829 to A5832, and issues a command from the winning symbol command area. A hit pattern is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5834).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small winning fanfare command as an effect command (A5835), and executes effect command setting processing (A5836). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A5837). If it is not a high-probability state (
The result of A5837 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838), and the second game state informing that it is right-handed. In order to turn off the display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10), the number in the left-hand hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5839). If it is in a high probability state (A
The result of 5837 is "Y"), the signal related to the right-handed instruction (ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5840), and the second game state informing that it is right-handed. In order to light the display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5841).

After steps A5839 and A5841, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a small win to open the upper big winning opening (A5842). If it is a small hit to open the upper big winning opening (result of A5842 is "Y"), clear the upper big winning opening illegal winning number area (A5843),
Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5844),
Execute special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process shift setting process (A5847), and end the special figure 2 display process. If it is not a small hit that opens the upper big prize opening (the result of A5842 is "N")
In other words, if it is a small win to open the lower big winning opening, clear the lower big winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5845), save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area ( A5846), and execute processing transition setting processing during special figure 2 small hit fanfare (A5847
), end the special figure 2 display process.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a small hit (if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5827 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game If the result of is lost, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5848). If it is not a high-probability final change (the result of A5848 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5856.

If the game control device 100 is a high probability final variation (the result of A5848 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5849), and executes the effect command setting process (A5850). . Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area when the power is restored (A5851), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A58
52). After that, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A5853
). If it is a small hit state of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5853 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A5856.

If the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5853 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5
854). Subsequently, the second game state display section 56 (lamp D8
-D10), save the number in the left-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5855), and clear the special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5
856). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 2 normal processing transition setting process 1 is executed (A5857), and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended. In the special figure 2 normal processing transition setting process 1, "0" is set as the processing number in order to transition to the special figure 2 normal processing, and processing such as saving the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area is performed.

[Fanfare/In-interval processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 display process and the special figure 2 display process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval process transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the signal related to the start of the jackpot (ON data of the jackpot 1 signal) in the external information output data area (A5901), and saves the signal related to the end of the high probability & short time in the test signal output data area. (A5902), and clears the round number area for managing the number of rounds in the RWM (A5903).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A
5904), save the special low probability & no time saving flag in the special game mode flag area (
A5905). By setting the special low probability & no time saving flag, the probability of hitting will be low,
It becomes a state without working hours (no longer working hours). Subsequently, when the power failure is restored, the production control device 30
Save the command output to 0 Probability information command (
low probability) is saved (A5906), and the high probability fluctuation frequency area that holds the high probability fluctuation frequency is cleared in the RWM (A5907).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the big hit information in the special figure status area (A59
08), clear the high-probability final change flag area that holds the high-probability final change flag in the RWM (A5909). Subsequently, a signal (ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5910), and the second game state display section 56 (lamp D8 -D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5911).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (A5912), and stores the special figure 2 abnormal number area that holds the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number in the RWM. 0 clear (A5913), 0 special figure 1 fluctuation count area that holds the number of special figure 1 fluctuations in RWM
Clear (A5914), special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area that holds the value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer in RWM is cleared to 0 (A5915), fanfare / end processing transition setting processing during interval.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
Next, special figure 1 small per fanfare processing transition setting processing in special figure 1 display processing (A
5744) will be described in detail. FIG. 60A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small winning fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

First, the game control device 100 sets "7" as the processing number in order to shift to processing during the small winning fanfare (A6001a), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6002a). Subsequently, the small win fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6003a), and the signal related to the start of the small win (on data of the big win 1 signal) is saved in the external information output data area. (A6004a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the special figure 1 small hit (on data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A6005a), and saves it in the special figure status area. Save the information (A6006a). Furthermore, the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6007a), and the process transition setting process during the special figure 1 small hit fanfare is ended.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process]
Next, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process in the special figure 2 display process (A
5847) will be described in detail. FIG. 60B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process during the special figure 2 small hit fanfare.

In the special figure 2 small winning fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process, "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) in the special figure 1 small winning fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process (Fig. 60A) is changed to "special figure 2" (special symbol 2). , and since the same processing as the processing transition setting processing during the special figure 1 small fanfare is performed, detailed description will be omitted. It should be noted that steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process respectively correspond to steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process (A3211, A3314) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. Figure 61 shows the fanfare/
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an interval process.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A610
1). In addition, since the number of rounds is set to 0 in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (A5903), it is set to 0 before the start of this big hit operation. Thereafter, a round command corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6102), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 sets an initial value of the jackpot process control pointer corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6104), and saves it in the jackpot process control pointer area of RWM (A6105). Here, in the case of a pattern that repeats the opening and closing of the big winning opening during one round, set 0 as the initial value, and in the case of the pattern of opening the big winning opening only once during one round, the initial value is the upper limit. Set a value (=21). In the case of a pattern that repeatedly opens and closes, the initial value may not be 0, but may be a value greater than 0 and less than the upper limit (that is,
start with a value in the middle). Alternatively, one of the upper and lower special prize openings may be repeatedly opened and closed, and the other may be opened only once, or both the upper and lower special prize openings may be opened and closed. It is good also as a pattern which repeats or a pattern which opens only once.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6106). Subsequently, "4" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (A6107), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6108). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A6108 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6109), and the special figure 1 game processing of the big winning opening opening time Save in the timer area (A6110). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6108 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6111), and the special figure 2 game processing timer for the special figure 2 game processing time Save to area (A6112).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big win to open the upper big winning opening based on the big winning opening opening information (A6113). In the case of a big hit that opens the upper prize slot (
The result of A6113 is "Y"), and the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A6114
), ending the fanfare/interval process. If it is not a big hit that opens the upper big prize opening (the result of A6113 is "N"), that is, if it is a big hit that opens the bottom big prize opening,
The process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A6115), and the fanfare/interval process ends. In the present embodiment, there are two types of jackpots: one that opens only the upper big winning opening and one that opens only the lower big winning opening. Configurations are also possible.

[Process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing 1 (A6114) during the opening of the big winning opening in the fanfare/interval processing will be described. FIG. 62A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening.

The game control device 100 saves the signal (ON data of the special electric accessory 1 in operation signal) related to the opening of the upper big winning opening in the test signal output data area (A6201a), and saves it in the RWM big winning opening solenoid output data area. , Turn on the upper big winning opening solenoid 39b Save the upper big winning opening ON data (A6202a), clear the big winning opening count number (A6203a),
The process shift setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening is ended.

[Process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 2 (A6115) during the opening of the big winning opening in the fanfare/interval process will be described. FIG. 62B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening.

The game control device 100 saves the signal (ON data of the special electric accessory 2 in operation signal) related to the opening of the lower grand prize opening in the test signal output data area (A6201b), and stores it in the RWM big prize opening solenoid output data area. , Turn on the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b Save the lower special winning opening ON data (A6202b), clear the big winning opening count number (A6203b),
The process shift setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening is ended.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning mouth]
Next, special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing during large winning opening opening processing (A3212
, A3315) will be described in detail. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during the opening of the big winning opening.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the process control pointer during the jackpot (A63
01), it is determined whether or not the value of the loaded jackpot process control pointer is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (for example, 21) (A6302). When the value of the big-hit process control pointer is less than the big-hit operation end value (the result of A6302 is "N"), the big-hit process control pointer is updated by +1 (A6303), and the process according to the big-hit process control pointer is performed. Operation transition setting processing is executed (A6304), and the processing during opening of the big winning opening is ended.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the current round is the final round when the value of the big-hit process control pointer is equal to or greater than the big-hit operation end value (A6302 result is "Y"). If the round number (A6101) updated by +1 in the fanfare/interval processing is the final round number (eg 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R),
It can be determined that it is the final round.

If it is not the final round (the result of A6305 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares an interval command as an effect command (A6306), and executes effect command setting processing (A6308). If it is the final round (the result of A6305 is "Y"), an ending command is prepared as an effect command (A6307), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6308).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (
A6309), set "5" as the processing number in order to shift to the big winning hole remaining ball processing (
A6310). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A63
11). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6311 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6312), and the remaining ball processing time is a special figure 1 game processing timer Save in area (A6313). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6311 is "N"), save this processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6314), and save the remaining ball processing time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area save to (A
6315).

After steps A6313 and A6315, the game control device 100 saves off data in the output data area for the large winning opening solenoid in order to turn off both the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (A6316), The processing during the opening of the big winning opening is terminated.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit operation transition setting process (A6304) in the big winning opening opening process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit operation transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first branches by the process control pointer during the jackpot (A640
1). It is also possible to use the value before updating +1 in step A6303 instead of the current value for the process control pointer during the big hit. If the value of the jackpot processing control pointer is an even number, set the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the jackpot processing control pointer (A
6402), save the OFF data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A6403
).

When the value of the process control pointer during the big win is an odd number, the game control device 100 sets the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the process control pointer during the big win (A6404). For example, the opening time of the big winning opening is that the processing control pointer during the jackpot is 1 to 19 (the processing control pointer during the jackpot = 1 to 1
In the case of 9), it is 200 msec, and when the jackpot middle processing control pointer is 21 (jackpot middle processing control pointer=21), it is 25000 msec. The 200 msec opening time of the big winning opening is used in the case of a pattern in which the opening and closing of the big winning opening for a short period of time are repeated during one round. Subsequently, the upper large winning opening ON data for turning on the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A6405). As a result, the upper special winning opening can be repeatedly opened and closed for a short period of time. In addition, here, when the lower special prize opening repeats opening and closing for a short time, the lower special prize opening ON data is saved in the large prize opening solenoid output data area, or the lower special prize opening ON data and the upper special prize opening A configuration in which both data are saved is also possible.

After steps A6403 and A6405, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A6406). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6406 is "Y"), the set time (wait time or big winning opening opening time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6407). If the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A6406 is "N"), that is, if the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6408 ).

[Large prize mouth residual ball processing]
Next, large winning opening remaining ball processing in special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing (A3213
, A3316) will be described in detail. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big winning hole remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6501). If it is not the final round (the result of A6501 is "N"), the test signal output of the signal related to the end of the opening of the big winning opening (off data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) Save in the data area (A6502), set the interval time corresponding to the big winning mouth opening information and the number of rounds (A6503), and set "3" as the processing number to shift to fanfare/interval processing (A6504) ). As a result, the fanfare/interval processing, the large winning opening open processing, and the large winning opening remaining ball processing are repeated until the final round is reached. The interval period between the rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the processing time for the balls remaining in the big winning opening and the interval time.

When the game control device 100 is the final round (the result of A6501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the jackpot end processing transition setting process for shifting to the jackpot end processing (A6505), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. is set (A6506), and "6
” is set (A6507). As a result, it is possible to shift to the jackpot ending process. The length of the ending period is the sum of the ending time and the remaining ball processing time in the big winning opening, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like during this ending period.

After steps A6504 and A6507, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A6508). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (result of A6508 is "Y"), the set processing number ("3" or "6") is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6509), set The time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6510), and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

If the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A6508 is "N"), that is, if the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 determines the processing number ("3" or "
6") is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6511), and the set time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6512
), and the process of remaining balls in the big winning slot ends.

[Jackpot end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot ending process transition setting process (A6505) in the big winning hole remaining ball process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot ending process shift setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal (off data of the special electric role product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric role product 2 operating signal) related to the end of the large winning opening to the test signal output data area ( A6601), clear the big winning hole count area that holds the big winning hole count number in the RWM (A6602), and clear the round number area (A6603). Subsequently, the round number upper limit area is cleared (A6604), the round number upper limit information area is cleared (A6605), the big winning opening opening information area is cleared (A6606), and the process control pointer area during the jackpot is cleared. (A6607).

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A6701), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6702).
. Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the jackpot (off data of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal off data) is saved in the external information output data area (A6703), and the signal about the start of the high probability & short time (output from the jackpot) (A6704).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6705). Signals relating to the end of the jackpot are, for example, OFF data of the conditional device operating signal, OFF data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and OFF data of the one special symbol winning signal. Subsequently, a signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time reduction is, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, a special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal. . After that, the signal (firing position designation signal 1) relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (A6707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the high probability number in the game state display number area (
A6708), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6709)
, saves the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A6710). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6711), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6712), and the special figure status Clear area (A6713)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot state (A6714). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern is only the variable probability pattern, and after the jackpot ends, the state becomes a high-probability state and also the time-saving state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high-probability fluctuation frequency is saved in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region for holding the high-probability fluctuation frequency (A6715). After that, save the probability information command (high probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6716).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6717), and ends the special figure 1 big hit ending process. This special figure 2 game wait time value delays the determination of the start of variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) at the next timer interrupt process (Fig. 12) is set to Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8m, which is twice the interrupt period.
sec (that is, 2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

Assuming that the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, special figure 2 game processing ( In A1311 of FIG. 12), since the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts (starting within this timer interrupt process), special figure 2 from the special figure 1 fluctuation display game
The variable display game will start first, which may cause a problem. In addition, since the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it remains at 0. Therefore, regarding the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game, it is performed in the next timer interrupt process (special figure 1 normal process during the special figure 1 game process).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice the interrupt period (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starting within the timer interrupt process of this time ) This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt process, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further-
1 update (decrease of 4 msec) to 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) is performed . As a result, in the next timer interrupt processing after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game, the determination of the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing) is performed, and if the starting condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can start varying at the same time. In addition, as described above, while the special figure 1 variation display game is in the jackpot state, the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped with a lost pattern (forcibly terminated or originally not changed).

In addition, after the end of the jackpot state, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, if there is no particular problem in game control, the processing of step A6717 is omitted, and the special It is not necessary to set the FIG. 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as the processing number to return to the special figure 2 normal processing (A6801), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6802).
. Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the jackpot (off data of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal off data) is saved in the external information output data area (A6803), and the signal about the start of the high probability & short time (output from the jackpot) (A6804).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6805). Signals relating to the end of the jackpot are, for example, OFF data of the conditional device operating signal, OFF data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and OFF data of the special pattern 2 winning signal. Subsequently, a signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6806). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time reduction is, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, a special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal. . After that, the signal (firing position designation signal 1) relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (A6807).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the high probability number in the game state display number area (
A6808), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6809)
, saves the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A6810). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6811), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6812), special figure status Clear area (A6813)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to make the high probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot state (A6814). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern is only the variable probability pattern, and after the jackpot ends, the state becomes a high-probability state and also the time-saving state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high-probability fluctuation frequency is saved in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region for holding the high-probability fluctuation frequency (A6815). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6816).

It should be noted that there is no need to set the special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0, and in the next timer interrupt process, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game start to fluctuate. Judgment (within special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing) is performed, and if the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game start fluctuation at the same time because it can

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process (A
3215, A3318) will be described in detail. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during the small winning fanfare.

The game control device 100, first, the opening pattern of the big winning opening by the small hit (special figure 1 small hit,
Branch according to special figure 2 hit 1, 2, 3) (A6901). The opening pattern of the big winning mouth due to the small hit is the stop pattern number of the small hit (A4312a, A4312b) and the small hit pattern (
(A4313a, A4313b stop symbol pattern).

The game control device 100, when the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, prepares the command during the small hit opening of the lower big winning opening opening as the production command (A6902), and executes the production command setting process ( A6903). Next, set "8" as the processing number (A69
04), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6905), save the small winning opening time 1 (for example, 48 msec) as the opening time of the big winning opening in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6906) . Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small winning operation (on data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6907), and the lower large winning opening ON data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area is saved (A6908).

The game control device 100, when the opening pattern due to the small win is the special figure 2 small win 1, prepares the command during the small win opening of the lower big winning opening opening as the production command (A6909), and executes the production command setting process. (A6910). Next, set "8" as the processing number (A6
911), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6912), save the small hit opening time 2 (for example, 1600 msec) as the opening time of the big winning opening in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6913) . Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small winning operation (ON data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6914), and the lower large winning opening ON data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. is saved (A6915).

The game control device 100, when the opening pattern due to the small win is the special figure 2 small win 2, prepares the command during the small win opening of the upper big winning opening opening as the production command (A6916), and executes the production command setting process. (A6917). Next, set "8" as the processing number (A6
918), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6919), and save the small winning opening time 3 (for example, 1200 msec) as the opening time of the big winning opening in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6920) . Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small winning operation (on data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6921), and the upper large winning opening ON data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area is saved (A6922).

The game control device 100, when the opening pattern by the small win is the special figure 2 small win 3, prepares the command during the small win opening of the upper big winning prize opening opening as the production command (A6923), and executes the production command setting process. (A6924). Next, set "8" as the processing number (A6
925), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6926), and save the small hit opening time 4 (for example, 1600 msec) as the opening time of the big winning opening in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6927) . Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small winning operation (on data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6928), and the upper large winning opening ON data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area is saved (A6929).

After steps A6908, A6915, A6922, and A6929, the game control device 100 clears the big winning opening count area (A6930), and ends the small winning fanfare process.

As described above, for each type of small hit release pattern corresponding to the small hit stop pattern number or the small hit pattern (special figure 1 small hit, special figure 2 small hit 1, 2, 3), the size to be opened by the small hit Prize entrance (
Either the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening), the opening time of the big winning opening (small hit opening time), etc. are determined. In this embodiment, the control pointer is not set, and only the small winning opening pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once is used. There may be a repeating small hit open pattern. Further, by setting "8" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the processing during the small winning after the processing during the small winning fanfare is completed.

[Small hit middle processing]
Next, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process (A3216, A3
319) will be described in detail. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during a small hit.

The game control device 100 first prepares a small winning end screen command as a production command (
A7001), effect command setting processing is executed (A7002). Thereby, the effect control device 300 that has received the small winning end screen command can cause the display device 41 to display the small winning end screen.

Next, the game control device 100, the opening pattern of the big winning opening by the small hit (special figure 1 small hit,
Branch according to special figure 2 hit 1, 2, 3) (A7003).

The game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number when the release pattern due to the small win is the special figure 1 small win (A7004), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7005). , Small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7006). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower big winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper big winning opening solenoid 39b, the OFF data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A7007), and the process during the small winning is ended.

The game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number when the opening pattern due to the small hit is the special figure 2 small prize 1 (A7008), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7009 ), saving the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (for example, 600 msec) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7010). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower big winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper big winning opening solenoid 39b, the OFF data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A7011), and the process during the small winning is ended.

The game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number when the release pattern due to the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2 or the special figure 2 small hit 3 (A7012), and sets the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save the processing number (A7013), small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (eg 800mse
c) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7014). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower big winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper big winning opening solenoid 39b, the OFF data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A7015), and the process during the small winning is ended.

By setting "9" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small-hit remaining ball processing after the end of the small-hit processing.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
Next, the special figure 1 game processing and the small hit remaining ball processing in the special figure 2 game processing (A3217,
A3320) will be described in detail. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variation display game (A7101). If it is a small hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A7101 is "Y"
), set "10" as the processing number (A7102), save this processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7103), small hit ending time (eg 100 msec)
is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7104).

If the game control device 100 is not a small hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A7101 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the processing number is "10".
is set (A7105), and this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A71
06), saving the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7107).

After steps A7104 and A7107, the game control device 100 outputs a signal (off data of the special electric role product 1 in operation signal and off data of the special electric role product 2 in operation signal) related to the end of the small hit operation as test signal output data. It saves in the area (A7108), clears the big winning hole count number area (A7109), and ends the small hit remaining ball processing. In addition, "10" as the processing number
By setting, after the end of the small hit remaining ball processing, it is possible to shift to the small hit end processing.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit ending process.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (
A7201), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7202). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the small win (off data of the special symbol 1 small win signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7203), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7204). In addition, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A7205), and clear the special figure status area (A7206).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in a high probability state (A72
07). If the high probability state (result of A7207 is "Y"), save the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210). If it is not a high probability state (the result of A7207 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7208), and in the game state display number 2 area The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7209), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210).

Here, for the same reason as step A6717 of special figure 1 jackpot end processing (Fig. 67),
8 msec (2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the time of the interrupt cycle, is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area as a special figure 2 game wait time value. As a result, in the next timer interrupt processing after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game, the determination of the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing) is performed, and if the starting condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can start varying at the same time.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 2 normal processing (
A7301), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the small win (off data of the special symbol 2 small win signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7304), and saves the during fraud monitoring period flag in the lower grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7305). In addition, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A7306), and clear the special figure status area (A7307).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in a high probability state (A73
08). If it is in a high probability state (result of A7308 is "Y"), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If it is not a high probability state (the result of A7308 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A730
9), save the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A7310), special figure 2
End the small hit end processing.

In addition, for the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 68), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit end process.

[Symbol variation control process]
Next, the symbol variation control process (A3220,
A3323) will be described in detail. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the symbol variation control process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

In the game control device 100, first, among the special figures 1 and 2, the special figure variation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1) is a fluctuating flag (a flag indicating that it is fluctuating). (A7401). If it is in fluctuation, a fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area (A5205a, A5205b).

And, as a result of the check, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation control flag is a flag during fluctuation (A7402), and if the special figure fluctuation control flag is a flag during fluctuation (A7402 The result is "Y"), to obtain the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the special figure (for example, special figure 1) to be controlled (A7403). The address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). moreover,
Of the special figures 1 and 2, the flashing control timer related to the special figure of the control target (for example, special figure 1) -
It is updated by 1 (A7404), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0, that is, time has expired (A7405).

If the value of the flashing control timer is not 0 (the result of A7405 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the display data corresponding to the value of the target varying pattern number area (A7408
). If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (result of A7405 is "Y"), the initial value of the blink control timer (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the area of the blink control timer to be controlled (A7406). Furthermore, among the special figures 1 and 2, the special figure of the control target (for example, the special figure 1
) is updated by +1 and saved in the target variable pattern number area (A740
7) Acquire the display data corresponding to the value of the target varying pattern number area (A7408).
After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the pattern variation control process is terminated.

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6A, the variable display game that repeats the non-lighting pattern (fluctuation pattern number=0) and the lighting pattern (fluctuation pattern number=1) is the special pattern display to be controlled. Device (special figure 1 indicator 51 or special figure 2 indicator 52) is executed. The initial value of the changing pattern number is set to 0 indicating the non-lighting pattern in FIG. 5 (A5207a, A5207b).
.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the special figure fluctuation flag is not a fluctuation flag (A7
The result of 402 is "N"), and the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is acquired (A7409). The address of the symbol display table (for stop) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Then, display data corresponding to the target stop symbol area value (stop symbol number) is acquired (A7410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6A, among the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the special figure indicator (special figure 1 indicator 51 or special figure 2 display In the device 52), the stop symbol of the special figure corresponding to the stop symbol number will be displayed. It should be noted that, in the stop pattern area, stop pattern numbers are saved corresponding to big wins, small wins, or losses (A5324, A
5424).

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of segment LED editing processing. In the segment LED editing process, the round display unit 53 provided in the collective display device 50,
Special figure 1 holding display (storage display unit) 54, first game state display unit 55, second game state display unit 5
Settings related to driving of the segment LEDs constituting 6 and the like are made.

The game control device 100, first, the special figure 1 in which the display mode in the special figure 1 reservation display 54 is specified
Set the pending number table (A7501), acquire the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number and save it in the segment area of the special figure 1 pending display (A7502).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a round display table that defines the display mode in the round display unit 53 (A7503), acquires display data corresponding to the round LED pointer, and stores it in the segment area of the round display unit 53. Save (A7504).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 that defines the display mode in the first game state display section 55 (A7505). Furthermore, the display data corresponding to the game state display number in the game state display number area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display section 55 (A7506). Thereby, the high probability state or the low probability state can be displayed in the first game state display section 55 .

After that, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 that defines the display mode in the second game state display section 56 (A7507). Furthermore, the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 in the game state display number 2 area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game state display section 56 (A7508), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. This will
In the second game state display section 56, it is possible to display whether the game is right-handed or left-handed.

In addition, when the third game state display section 57 indicating that the variable display game is being interrupted is provided in accordance with the modification described later, the game control device 100 controls the display on the third game state display section 57. A game state display table in which a mode is defined is set, display data corresponding to whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted is acquired, and the third game state display unit 5
7 segment area.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

The game control device 100 first turns on the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2), that is, abnormal Determine whether or not magnetism is detected (A
7601).

When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A7601 is "Y"), the game control device 100
That is, when an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for counting the detection period of the abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (A7602), and it is determined whether or not the timer has timed out (A7603).

The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (the result of A7603 is "Y"), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time ( A7604), save the initial value of the magnet fraud alert timer (for example, 60 seconds) in the magnet fraud alert timer area (A7605).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud notification command as an effect command (A7606), and prepares a magnet fraud occurrence flag indicating that magnet fraud has occurred as a magnet fraud flag (A7607). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously on for a certain period (e.g., 8 interrupts) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, if the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not ON (the result of A7601 is "N"), that is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared. (A7608). If the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A7609). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A7610). Even if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (
If the result of A7603 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A7609.

The game control device 100 terminates the magnet fraud monitoring process when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7610 is "N"), that is, when the time has not expired.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7610 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the fraud notification period has ended, or if fraudulent reporting has not been made from the beginning,
A magnet irregularity notification end command is prepared as an effect command (A7611).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud cancellation flag as a magnet fraud flag (
A7612), it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A7613 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. on the other hand,
If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A7613 is "N"), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (A7614
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7615). After that, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Processing for monitoring radio wave fraud]
Next, the details of the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the procedure of board radio wave unauthorized monitoring processing. In the board radio fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

The game control device 100 first turns on the radio wave sensor 62 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I/F 121, that is, Determine whether or not abnormal radio waves are detected (A77
01). If the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A7701 is "Y"), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud alarm timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud alarm timer area ( A7702).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a board radio wave irregularity notification command as an effect command (A7703), and prepares a board radio wave irregularity occurrence flag indicating that a board radio irregularity has occurred as a board radio irregularity flag (A7704). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (A7709). In other words, in the case of radio fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A7701 is "N
'), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer, which defines the radio wave fraud notification time, is updated by -1 if it is not 0 (A7705). Note that the minimum value of the radio tampering alarm timer is set to zero.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is 0 (A7706). If the value of the radio tampering alarm timer is not 0 (the result of A7706 is "N")
That is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7706 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the fraud notification period has ended, or if fraudulent reporting has not been made from the beginning,
A command for termination of radio wave fraud notification is prepared as an effect command (A7707). Further, a radio wave fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (A7708), and it is determined whether or not the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (A7709).

Then, when the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A7709 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the radio wave fraud monitoring process.
If the values do not match (the result of A7709 is "N"), the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio irregularity flag area (A7710), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7711). After that, the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1315) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (A1305), winning opening switch/status monitoring process (A13
08) Based on the monitoring results from the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313) and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1314), create information to be output to external devices such as information collection terminals, game hall internal management devices, and test fire test devices. and set it in the output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame open error is occurring (
A7801). If the glass frame open error is not occurring (the result of A7801 is "N"),
Determine whether or not a body frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A7802)
. If the body frame open error is not occurring (the result of A7802 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7803), and the OFF data of the security signal is saved as the external information output data. Save to area (A7804).

The game control device 100, when the glass frame open error is occurring (the result of A7801 is "Y"), or when the body frame open error is occurring (the result of A7802 is "Y"),
The ON data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7806).

After steps A7804 and A7806, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A7807), and checks whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired). Judge (A7808). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch (A1026 of main processing).
). Then, the security signal control timer starts counting from the time of RAM initialization.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A7808 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether frame radio fraud is occurring (A7809). If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A7808 is "N"), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. That is, the external information indicating that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output.

The game control device 100, if frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A7809 is "N")
, determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A7811). If frame radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A7809 is "Y"), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A7811 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7812), and the process proceeds to step A7813.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the magnet fraud is occurring (A7813) when the switch abnormality error is not occurring (the result of A7811 is "N"). Note that when the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A7813 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not board radio fraud is occurring (A7814). If the radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the radio wave fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100, when board radio fraud is not occurring (the result of A7814 is "N")
, Further, it is determined whether or not fraudulent large winning opening fraud is occurring (A7815). Incidentally, when the fraudulent prize occurrence flag regarding the big prize mouth (upper prize mouth or lower prize mouth) is saved in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that the fraud of the big prize mouth is occurring. If the big winning mouth fraud is not occurring (the result of A7815 is "N"), furthermore, it is determined whether the special figure 2 abnormal variation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 variation display game) is occurring ( A7816). In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, it can be determined that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring. If the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is not occurring (the result of A7816 is "N
”), save the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A7
817).

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A7813 is "Y
”), If board radio fraud is occurring (result of A7814 is “Y”), If big winning mouth fraud is occurring (result of A7815 is “Y”), or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation If it is occurring (the result of A7816 is "Y"), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7818), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (A7819). By setting the security signal to ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After steps A7817 and A7819, the game control device 100 performs starting port 1 signal editing processing (A7820), starting port 2 signal editing processing (A7821), main prize ball signal editing processing (A7
822), the number-of-symbols-fixed-count signal editing process (A7823) is executed, and the external information editing process ends. The starting port 1 signal editing processing is processing when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, and the starting port 2 signal editing processing is processing when there is an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a.

[Start port 1 signal editing process]
Next, the details of the starting port 1 signal editing process (A7020) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the start port 1 signal editing process.

The game control device 100 first updates the starting port 1 signal output control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A7901). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to zero.
Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (A7902).

When the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is 0, the game control device 100 (A79
02 result is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (A7903).
). Then, when the starting port 1 signal output count is not 0 (the result of A7903 is "N"),
The starting port 1 signal output count is updated by -1 (A7904), and the initial value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is saved in the starting port 1 signal output control timer area (A7905).

The initial value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is a time (eg, 128 ms) obtained by adding the ON state (eg, high level) time and the OFF state (eg, low level) time of the starting port 1 signal.
ec).

After that, the game control device 100 saves ON data for turning on the starting port 1 signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7907), and ends the starting port 1 signal editing process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the starting port 1 signal output count is 0 (A7903
result is "Y"), the off data for turning off the starter 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7908), and the starter 1 signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (
If the result of A7902 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section (A7906). Note that the fact that the starting port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

When the starting port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section (the result of A7906 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs ON data for turning the starting port 1 signal to the ON state as external information of RWM. It saves in the data area (A7907) and terminates the starting port 1 signal editing process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (the result of A7906 is "N"), the off data to turn off the starting port 1 signal for the external device The data is saved in the external information output data area of RWM (A7908), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

[Start port 2 signal editing process]
Next, the starting point 2 signal editing process (A7021) in the external information editing process is just replacing "starting point 1" in the starting point 1 signal editing process with "starting point 2". Drawings are omitted.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A7022) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the procedure of main prize ball signal editing processing. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs to an external device a main prize ball signal generated each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the main prize ball signal output control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A8001). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A8002).

When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0, the game control device 100 (A8
The result of 002 is "Y"), and further, it is determined whether or not the number of output of the main prize ball signal is 0 (A8003).

Then, if the main prize ball signal output count is not 0, the game control device 100 (A80
03 result is "N"), the number of main prize ball signal output is updated by -1 (A8004), and the initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is saved in the main prize ball signal output control timer area (A80
05). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the ON state of the main prize ball signal (for example,
High level) time plus OFF state time (e.g. low level) time (e.g.
128 msec).

After that, the game control device 100 RWM the on-data to turn on the main prize ball signal
(A8007), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. Also, when the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (the result of A8003 is "Y"),
Off data for turning off the main prize signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8008), and the main prize signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8002 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section. is determined (A8006). It should be noted that the fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (the result of A8006 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the on data to turn on the main prize ball signal by RWM
external information output data area (A8007). In addition, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (the result of A8006 is "N"), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is the external information output data of the RWM. It saves in the area (A8008), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

[Signal determination number signal editing process]
Next, the details of the pattern confirmation count signal editing process (A7023) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the number-of-symbols-fixed signal editing process. The number-of-symbols-fixed-count signal editing process is a process of outputting to an external device a number-of-symbols-fixed-count signal generated when a stop pattern of a variable display game is decided.

The game control device 100 first updates the number-of-symbols decision signal output control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A8101). Note that the minimum value of the pattern determination count signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-symbols-fixed signal output control timer is 0 (A8102).

The game control device 100, when the value of the number of pattern determination signal output control timer is 0 (A
The result of 8102 is "Y"), and further, it is determined whether or not the number of output times of the number of times of pattern determination signal is 0 (A8103).

Then, the game control device 100, when the pattern determination number signal output number is not 0 (A8
The result of 103 is "N"), the design decision number signal output count is updated by -1 (A8104), and the pattern decision number signal output control timer initial value is saved in the pattern decision number signal output control timer (A8104).
8105). The initial value of the design determination count signal output control timer is the ON state of the design determination count signal (
For example, the time (eg, 556 msec) is obtained by adding the time (eg, high level) (eg, 256 msec) and the time (eg, low level) in the OFF state (eg, 300 msec).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the on-data to RW to turn on the number-of-symbols-fixed-count signal.
The data is saved in the external information output data area of M (A8107), and the pattern determination count signal editing process is terminated. Also, if the number of output times of the number of symbol determination signals is 0 (the result of A8103 is "Y
'), the OFF data for turning off the pattern determination count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8108), and the design determination count signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the number of symbol determination signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8102 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the number of symbol determination signal output control timer is in the output ON section. is determined (A8106). It should be noted that when the design determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON section, the value of the design determination number signal output control timer is set for a predetermined time (for example, 300 m).
sec).

When the pattern confirmation number signal output control timer is in the output ON section (the result of A8106 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the ON data to turn on the pattern confirmation number signal.
It is saved in the external information output data area of WM (A8107). In addition, when the pattern confirmation number signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (the result of A8106 is "N"), off data for turning off the pattern confirmation number signal for the external device is external information output data of the RWM. The data is saved in the area (A8108), and the pattern determination count signal editing process is terminated.

[Modified example of control of game control device]
Below, the modification of control (process) of a game control apparatus is demonstrated. Configurations other than those described below are the same as the aforementioned control (processing) of the game control device.

In the above control processing (FIGS. 53, 54, etc.), during the fluctuation of one special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game or special figure 2 variation display game), the other special figure variation display game When (special figure 2 variation display game or special figure 1 variation display game) becomes a hit result (big hit or small win), one of the special figure variation display games is forcibly changed and ended (forcibly terminated) with a losing result. However, as in the following modification, in this case, regarding this one special figure variation display game, the measurement of the variation time by the timer is interrupted to derive the game result (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and one of the interrupted special figure variation display games is restarted after the winning operation of the other special figure variation display game is finished (after the big win state or the small win state is finished).

It should be noted that even while the special figure variation display game is interrupted, the special symbol (identification information) itself apparently continues to change in the display device 41 and the special figure variation display unit (special figure 1 indicator 51 or special figure 2 indicator 52) (It should be noted that it is also possible to temporarily stop the fluctuation of the special symbol during the interruption). In the case of apparently continuing the fluctuation, in another concept, it can be said that the fluctuation time for one special symbol is extended by the time of the winning operation for the other special symbol (the time of the big win state or the small win state). .

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 game process (A1310) described above will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process according to the modification. FIG. 82 is obtained by adding the processing of step S8200 to FIG. Steps A3201 to A3220 in FIG.
Since the processing up to this point is the same as that in FIG. 32, the description thereof is omitted.

The game control device 100 first displays a special figure 1 indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted.
It is determined whether or not the game interruption flag is set (S8200). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8200 is "N"), the processing from step A3201 to A3220 is executed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (S82
00 result is "Y"), without performing the processing of steps A3201 to A3218, after preparing the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (A3219),
The symbol variation control process related to the special figure 1 display device 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted, the timing (renewal) of the variation time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variation time is stopped. note that,
By the design variation control process, in the special figure 1 display device 51, the variation itself of the special design is apparently continued.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing (Modified Example)]
A modification of the special figure 2 game process (A1311) described above will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game processing according to the modification. FIG. 83 is obtained by adding the process of step S8300 to FIG. Steps A3301 to A3323 in FIG.
Since the processing up to this point is the same as that in FIG. 33, the description thereof is omitted.

The game control device 100 first displays a special figure 2 indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted.
It is determined whether or not the game interruption flag is set (S8300). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8300 is "N"), the processing from step A3301 to A3323 is executed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S83
00 result is "Y"), without performing the processing of steps A3301 to A3321, after preparing a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A3322),
The symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 display device 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is ended. In this way, when the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the timing (renewal) of the variation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the variation time is stopped. note that,
By design variation control processing, in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variation itself of the special design continues apparently.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Process (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuating process according to the modification.
FIG. 84 deletes the processing from step A5311 to A5319 in FIG.
11 to S8416 are added. Steps A5301 to A5 in FIG.
310 and steps A5320 to A5325 are the same as those in FIG. 53, so description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a loss (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and if the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (A5
309 result is "N" and A5310 result is "Y"), steps S8411 to S84
By the processing of 16, the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted. When the special figure 1 variation display game of the winning result stops variation, the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted.

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not lost and when the special figure 2 is fluctuating, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss (S8
411). If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost (the result of S8411 is "Y"
), the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (special figure 2 game processing timer = 4 ms
ec) is determined (S8412). That is, based on the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variation display game will end at the same timing as the special figure 1 variation display game (in the same interrupt processing). do.

Game control device 100, when the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (
The result of S8412 is "Y"), the special figure 2 game processing immediately after this special figure 1 game processing (starting in this timer interrupt processing), the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec ) and becomes 0, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be ended with a loss result. Therefore, in this case, since there is no need to interrupt the special figure 2 variable display game, the process proceeds to step A5324.

If the game control device 100 does not lose the result of the special figure 2 variation display game (S8411
result is "N"), or if the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 msec (
The result of S8412 is "N"), a special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted is set (S8413). Special figure 2 game interruption flag is used for the determination of the above step S8300. Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8414), and an effect command setting process is executed (S8415). Effect control device 3 that receives the decoration special figure 2 interruption command
00 can set an effect for interrupting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (reduction of 4 msec) (S8416). This is the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S8413),
Since the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game processing immediately after the special figure 1 game processing this time, here, instead, the special figure 2 game processing timer is -1
It is to be updated (reduced by 4 msec). As a result, when restarting the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game, it is possible to prevent the extra figure 2 game processing timer from increasing by 4 msec (see FIG. 105).

After step S8416, the game control device 100 performs step A532 in the same manner as in FIG.
0 to A5325 are executed. It should be noted that, unlike FIG. 53, in the process during special figure 1 fluctuation according to the modification, the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 2 display is not executed.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Process (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 2 during fluctuation processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process according to the modification.
FIG. 85 deletes the processing from step A5411 to A5419 in FIG.
11 to S8513 are added. Steps A5401 to A5 in FIG.
410 and steps A5420 to A5425 are the same as those in FIG. 54, so description thereof is omitted.

The game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a loss (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and if the special figure 1 is fluctuating (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (A5
409 result is "N" and A5410 result is "Y"), steps S8511 to S85
By the processing of 13, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. When the special figure 2 variation display game of the winning result stops variation, the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted.

The game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not lost and when the special figure 1 is fluctuating. Set (S8511). The special figure 1 game interruption flag is the above-mentioned step S8200
used to determine Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8512), and an effect command setting process is executed (S8513). The production control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 interruption command can set the production for interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game.

After step S8513, the game control device 100 performs step A542 in the same manner as in FIG.
0 to A5325 are executed. In addition, unlike FIG. 54, in special figure 2 change during processing which concerns on a modification, process transition setting process 2 is not performed during special figure 1 display.

[Special Figure 1 Jackpot End Processing (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process according to the modification. FIG. 86 is obtained by adding processing from steps S8617 to S8621 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A6701 to A6716 in FIG. 86 is the same as in FIG. 67, the description is omitted.

After step A6716, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (S8617). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set,
It can be determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of S8617 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (S8620), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8617 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (S8618), and effect command setting processing is executed (S86
19). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. After that, clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (S8620), and save the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621) , ends the special figure 1 jackpot end processing.

By clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the timing (update) of the variation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) that measures the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game restarts (S
8300 result is "N"). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

In addition, the processing of step S8621 is the same processing as step A6717 of FIG. 67, and the special figure 2 game wait time value is the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game. (Resume) is set to delay the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), which is 8 msec, which is twice the interrupt period. As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game can be restarted simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 variation display game by the timer interrupt processing after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game. If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 variation display game will be started (restarted) in the current timer interrupt process before the special figure 1 variation display game. In addition, after the end of the jackpot state,
Even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts (resumes) earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, if there is no particular problem in game control, the process of step A8621 is omitted, and the special figure 2 game wait You don't have to set a time value.

Also, depending on the special figure 2 game wait time value, the determination of the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game will be at the time of the next timer interrupt process, but the decoration special figure 2 restart command is set and transmitted first. This is because the processing cycle of the effect control device 300 is longer than that of the game control device 100.
This is because the interrupt time (4 msec) can be absorbed.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing (variant)]
A modification of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process according to the modification. FIG. 87 is obtained by adding processing from steps S8717 to S8720 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A6801 to A6816 in FIG. 87 is the same as in FIG. 68, the description is omitted.

After step A6816, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (S8717). If the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set,
It can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of S8717 is "N"), clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (S8720), 2. End the jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8717 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (S8718), and effect command setting processing is executed (S87
19). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is ended.

By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the timing (update) of the variation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) that measures the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game restarts (S
8300 result is "N"). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

In addition, in the special figure 2 jackpot ending process, the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set.
This is because both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started (restarted) in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) even if there is no special figure 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 1 small hit end process (variant example)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process according to the modification. FIG. 88 is obtained by adding processing from steps S8810 to S8814 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A7201 to A7209 in FIG. 72 is the same as in FIG. 72, the description is omitted.

If the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A7207 is "Y"), or
After step A7209, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (S8
810). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of S8810 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area (S8813), set the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) to the special figure 2 game Save in the processing timer area (S8814), and end the special figure 1 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8810 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (S8811), and effect command setting processing is executed (S88
12). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. After that, clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area (S
8813), the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end process is terminated. As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game can be restarted simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 variation display game in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game. Note that the processing of step S8814 is the same as that of step A7210 in FIG. Also, by clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been interrupted will be resumed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing according to the modification. FIG. 89 is obtained by adding processing from steps S8911 to S8814 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A7301 to A7210 in FIG. 73 is the same as that in FIG. 73, the description is omitted.

If the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A7308 is "Y"), or
After step A7310, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (S8
911). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of S8911 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8911 is "Y"), prepares the decoration special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (S8912), and executes the effect command setting process. (S8913). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. After that, special figure 2
Clear the game interruption flag area (S8914), and end the special figure 2 small hit end processing. In addition, by clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that has been interrupted can be resumed.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated. For convenience of explanation, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described as corresponding to the above modified example of the control of the game control device 100 (configuration for restarting the interrupted special figure fluctuation display game). In the case of the basic configuration (configuration that is not a modification) for forcibly terminating the special figure variation display game, the processing related to the interruption and resumption of the special figure variation display game may be omitted.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 90
2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (
B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, B
1003), and permit the interrupt (B1004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
00, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command sent from 00.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B1
008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initial setting (B1002) described above, and the CPU 311
to see if it's working properly. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B1009). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and volume by the player is executed (B1011). Then, random number update processing for updating random numbers such as effect random numbers is executed (B1011), the received command received from the game control device 100 is analyzed, and the corresponding received command check processing is executed (B1012). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display editing processing such as updating various data according to the content to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like, and setting the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B1013). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the preparation for drawing to the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B10
14).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B1015 is "N"), the process of B1015 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Instruct screen drawing (B1
016). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1017).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) made up of LEDs and the like (B1018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1019). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute a role object action effect.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B1008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B1019. Thereafter, the processing from B1008 to B1019 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, details of the received command check process (B1012) in the main process (FIG. 90) described above will be described. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the value for the number of commands received (B1103
), and copy the contents of the receive command buffer in the RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer holds 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y
]), loads the contents of the received command in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing for analyzing the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 91) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of received command analysis processing executed by .0.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). Commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, MODE section (MODE command) and A
It consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are M
It consists of an ODE section and an ACTION section in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
(B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). It should be noted that the variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decoration special design, and there are variation commands (A5014 and A5015 in FIG. 50). and MO
If the DE part indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a variable command (B12
(B
1207). Incidentally, the hit-related commands are commands for commanding operations (such as display of a fanfare screen and a round screen) during a big win or a small win. . If the MODE part indicates a winning command (the result in B1207 is "Y"), the winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a hit system command (B12
(B
1209). It should be noted that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4316a in FIG. 43A) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4316b in FIG. 43B) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, if the MODE part represents a pattern-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"),
The pattern-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the pattern system command (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol system command includes the look-ahead stop symbol command (see FIG. 31).
A3111). Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead pattern command (B
The result of 1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variation command (B1215). The look-ahead variation commands include the look-ahead variation pattern command (A3115 in FIG. 31). If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216
), and terminates the received command analysis process.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the AC for the MODE part
Even if the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. FIG. 93B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the one-shot command process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 (B1
If the result of 301 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (B1303). And if the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (
If the result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, if the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and single-shot command processing is terminated. In addition, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted (if there is a special figure game interruption flag that has been backed up in RWM), the special figure A suspended command (interrupted command) indicating that the 1 variable display game is suspended or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended is included.

If the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery, the effect control device 300 (
If the result of B1305 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, when the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1
The result of 307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE part does not indicate the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). Then, if the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), execute the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (B1310),
Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of decoration special figure 2 reservation command (B1311). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131
2) End the one-shot command processing.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is the game control device 100
, the processing of steps B1311 and B1312 may be omitted. However, if the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately even if the special figure 2 start memory occurs case), even in the above-mentioned special figure start port 2 switch processing (FIG. 30), the special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetching processing, pre-determination processing) is performed, and the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command from the game control device 100 may be sent.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 313 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (B1315). In addition, as an error / fraud system command, for example, fraud occurrence command (A2108), fraud cancellation command (A2116), special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command (A2414), special figure 2 abnormal change cancellation command (A2418), state off Command (A2
504), and a state on command (A2507). If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing is executed to notify or cancel the notification of an error or illegality (B1316), Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a command for switching the effect mode. Determine (B1317). Then, if the MODE part represents a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1
318), ending the single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a command for pattern stop. (B1319). In addition, as a command for design stop, there are a decoration special figure 1 stop command and a decoration special figure 2 stop command. Then, if the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command is normal (B1320). If the command is not a normal command (the result of B1320 is "N"), the single-shot command processing is terminated.

If the command is normal (result of B1320 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs stop setting for stopping the corresponding special figure (decoration special figure 1 or decoration special figure 2) (B132
1). Then, when all the special symbols (identification information) in the plurality of variable display areas of the display device 41 have stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (B1322), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In addition, the game state flag is a flag that can indicate states such as during variation, during a big hit, during a small hit, and the like.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a command for design stop (
If the result of B1319 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a command for interrupting the fluctuation (B1323). In addition, the command for the fluctuation interruption is the above-mentioned decoration special figure 1 interruption command (S8512 in FIG. 85) and decoration special figure 2 interruption command (S8414 in FIG. 84). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for interrupting the fluctuation (result of B1323 is "Y")
, the fluctuation interruption setting process is executed (B1324), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the command for the fluctuation interruption (
If the result of B1323 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a command for resuming fluctuation (B1325). It should be noted that the command for resuming the fluctuation is the above-mentioned decorative special figure 1 resume command (S8718 in FIG. 87) and decorative special figure 2 resume command (S8618 in FIG. 86). Then, if the MODE part indicates a command for interrupting the fluctuation (result of B1325 is "Y")
, the variable restart setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

In addition, even if the command for interrupting the fluctuation is not received, if a hit-related command relating to the performance of a win (big hit or small win) of one of the special figures 1 and 2 is received in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game, The production control device 300 may automatically determine whether or not the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, and the fluctuation interruption setting process and the subsequent fluctuation restart setting process may be performed.

[Variation interruption setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, details of the fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) in the above-described one-shot command process (FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the fluctuation interruption setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command for fluctuation interruption is a normal command (B1401). If the command is not normal (result of B1401 is "N
”), ending the fluctuation interruption setting process. If the command is normal (the result of B1401 is "
Y"), and it is determined whether or not the command was received when the power was turned on (B1402). If the command was received when the power was turned on (the result of B1402 is "Y"), the received command (
In response to the decoration special figure 1 suspension command or decoration special figure 2 suspension command), the suspension flag of the decoration special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating that the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being suspended Set (B1403).

If the effect control device 300 does not receive a command when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is "N"), the target pattern (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) to be interrupted from now on is fluctuating. That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display game of symbols to be interrupted is being executed (B1404). If the target symbol is not fluctuating (the result of B1404 is "N"), the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated. When the target pattern is fluctuating (result of B1404 is "Y")
, Determines whether the command for the received fluctuation interruption is the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (B
1405).

Effect control device 300, if the command for the received fluctuation interruption is decoration special figure 1 interruption command (the result of B1405 is "Y"), sets the fluctuation display for interruption of decoration special figure 1 (B14
06). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decoration special figure 1 is displayed large in the center, set the variable display for interruption such that it is moved to the corner and displayed in a reduced size. Alternatively, it is also possible to set an interruption variable display that displays in a state with higher transparency than usual. Subsequently, the decoration special figure 1 interrupting flag indicating that the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1407). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1408).

When the effect control device 300 is in a low probability state (the result of B1408 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the result of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (B1409). Decoration special figure 2
If the result of the variable display game is not a big win (the result of B1409 is "N"), the display device 41
In order to suggest interruption of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game, etc., the display setting for interruption of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed (B1410), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is ended.

If the effect control device 300 is not in a low probability state (the result of B1408 is "N"), that is,
In the case of a high probability state, since the effect of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41, the display setting for the interruption effect of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, and the variation is interrupted. End the setting process. Also, if the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (B1
The result of 409 is "Y"), in order to preferentially display the jackpot effect of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game on the display device 41, the display setting for the interruption effect of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, End the fluctuation interruption setting process.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command for the received fluctuation interruption is not a decoration special figure 1 interruption command (the result of B1405 is "N"), that is, if it is a decoration special figure 2 interruption command, decoration special figure 2 (B1411). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 is enlarged and displayed in the center (main display,
If it was normally displayed), you can set an interrupted variable display that moves to the corner and is displayed in a smaller size, or you can set an interrupted variable display that displays in a state with higher transparency than usual. good. Subsequently, the during suspension flag of the decoration special figure 2 indicating that the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is being suspended is set in the RAM or the like (B1412). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1413).

If the effect control device 300 is not in a low probability state (the result of B1413 is "N"), that is,
In the case of a high probability state, determine whether the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (
B1414). If the result of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is "N"), the display device 41 etc. suggests the interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, so that the decoration special figure 2 variation display game The display setting for the interruption effect is executed (B1415), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is ended.

When the effect control device 300 is in a low probability state (the result of B1413 is "Y"), since the effect of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41, the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation The variable interruption setting process is terminated without performing the display setting for the interruption effect of the display game. In addition, when the result of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of B1414 is "Y"), the display device 41 preferentially displays the big hit effect of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. The fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated without performing the display setting for the interruption effect of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

[Variable restart setting process]
Next, referring to FIG. 95, details of the variable restart setting process (B1326) in the above-described one-shot command process (FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable restart setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command for restarting the fluctuation is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (result of B1501 is "N
”), ending the variable restart setting process. If the command is normal (the result of B1501 is "
Y"), it is determined whether or not the command for the received fluctuation restart is the decoration special figure 1 restart command (B1502).

Effect control device 300, if the command for the received variation restart is the decoration special figure 1 resume command (the result of B1502 is "Y"), based on the flag during the interruption of decoration special figure 1, decoration special figure 1 variation It is determined whether or not the display game is being interrupted (B1503). If the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of B1503 is "N"), the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated.

When the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of B1503 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 clears the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 1 (B1504). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B150
5). The power failure recovery display is a display suggesting that the power failure has been recovered and that processing after power failure recovery is being performed. If the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1505 is "Y"), set the variable restart of the decorative special figure 1 for recovery according to the probability state (restart the decorative special figure 1 variable display game for recovery) (B1506). If the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1505 is "
N"), set the restart (not for recovery) of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game according to the probability state (B1507).

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the received variable restart command is not a decoration special figure 1 restart command (the result of B1502 is "N"), that is, if it is a decoration special figure 2 restart command, decoration special figure 2 Based on the interrupted flag, it is determined whether or not the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (B1508). If the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (B150
If the result of step 8 is "N"), the variable restart setting process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of B1508 is "Y"), clears the during interruption flag of decoration special figure 2 (B1509). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B151
0). If the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1510 is "Y"), set the variable restart of the decorative special figure 2 for recovery according to the probability state (restart the decorative special figure 2 variable display game for recovery) (B1511). If the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1510 is "N"), set the decoration special figure 2 variable display game restart (not for recovery) according to the probability state (B151
2).

With respect to the processing of steps B1506, B1507, B1511, and B1512, there is a possibility that the probability state has changed when the decoration special figure variation display game is interrupted and when it is resumed. Therefore, when the game is restarted, the pattern display mode differs depending on whether or not the target pattern is preferentially displayed. For example, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during a low probability, the reduced pattern of the special figure 1 in the corner of the display device 41 will be interrupted while the fluctuation continues, but if the probability is low even when restarting, the special figure 1
is largely preferentially displayed in the center of the display device 41. If it is in a high probability / time saving state at the time of restart, it will be restarted with the reduced pattern (reduced display).

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the prefetch pattern system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 96 shows the production control device 30
0 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a look-ahead symbol system command process executed by 0. FIG.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is the game control device 1
00, the processing of step B1603 is basically not executed. However, if the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately even if the special figure 2 start memory occurs in case of,
A decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is transmitted from the game control device 100, and step B16
03 may be executed.

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variation command reception waiting flag indicating that the look-ahead variation command is waiting for reception (B160
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 97, the details of the prefetch variation-related command processing (B1215) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 97 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of prefetch variation command processing executed by .0.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation command (B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. When waiting to receive a read-ahead variation command (the result of B1701 is "
Y"), and clears the read-ahead variation-related command reception wait flag (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub board) is the design of the latest pending information (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
(B1703), and acquire the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE part (B1703).
B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION part (ACT part) of the look-ahead variation command
part is obtained (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707).
. If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If the CT part is both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the MODE part after conversion and the A
The command after conversion composed of the CT part is saved in the latest pending information and the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) corresponding to the number of reservations (B1708). Then, the read-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170
9) Determine whether the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are different types of leeches of the same system,
If the ACT part (the value of the second half variation) of the look-ahead variation command is not converted, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. For example, even in normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop failure and normal reach +1 stop failure.
Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating the reach of the same system to the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , if the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N"), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the read-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1710 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the latest hold that occurred most recently is a loss (B1711). Effect control device 300, if the latest hold is hit (the result of B1711 is "
N"), calculate the total time until the latest pending special figure fluctuation display game ends fluctuation (B1
712). The total time includes the display time of the stop symbols.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the other decoration special figure variation display game is to be interrupted when the variation of the latest pending special figure variation display game ends (B1713). In addition, if the latest reservation is a special figure 1 reservation, the other decoration special figure variation display game becomes a decoration special figure 2 variation display game. Here, for example, after the calculated total time, if the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is not executed, or if the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is a loss fluctuation, the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game Determine not to interrupt.

If the effect control device 300 interrupts the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game (
If the result of B1713 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is a plan to execute the look-ahead effect for the interruption hold (B1714). It should be noted that the suspension suspension is suspension corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game to be suspended. In addition, the fact that there is an execution schedule includes the fact that the look-ahead effect is being executed. If there is a plan to execute the look-ahead effect for the suspension hold (the result of B1714 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect for the suspension hold is a hold change notice (B1715).

Effect control device 300, when the prefetch effect of suspension pending is not a pending change notice (B1715
(B1716). If the look-ahead effect has already progressed and it is unreasonable to forcibly end it, it is determined that the effect replacement will not be in time (the replacement is not performed). If the production can be replaced in time (the result of B1716 is "Y"), the command after conversion is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds so as to replace the production (B1717).
.

Effect control device 300, if the latest hold is lost (the result of B1711 is "Y"),
If the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of B1713 is "
N"), if there is no plan to execute the look-ahead effect for suspension hold (the result of B1714 is "N"
), if the look-ahead effect of suspension hold is a change notice of hold (the result of B1715 is "Y"), and if the effect replacement cannot be done in time (the result of B1716 is "N"), the effect is not replaced, and the process proceeds directly to step B1718. Go to processing.

Next, the effect control device 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the prefetch variation command area (B1718), and executes the prefetch lottery process for the latest hold prefetch effect (B1719). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest pending pre-reading notice effect is generated (B1720). If the latest pending pre-reading preview effect occurs (the result of B1720 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading preview effect to occur is an effect that starts immediately (B
1721). Immediate start effects include, for example, a pending change notice. If the pre-reading advance notice effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1721 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1722). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the latest pending pre-reading forewarning effect does not occur (B172
The result of 0 is "N"), or if the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is not the effect that starts immediately (
If the result of B1721 is "N"), leave it as it is. Terminates look-ahead variation command processing.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment as described above, in the special figure start mouth 2 switch process special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetching processing, prior determination processing) is not performed, special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 reservation) On the other hand, the prefetching symbol system command (prefetching stop symbol command) and the prefetching variation system command (prefetching variation pattern command) are not transmitted from the game control device 100 . Therefore, the processing from steps B1715 to B1717 is basically not executed. However, if the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately even if the special figure 2 start memory occurs case), the game control device 1 the prefetching pattern system command and the prefetching variation system command for the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 reservation)
00, and the processing from steps B1711 to B1717 may be executed.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

The effect control device 300 receives the pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
command) to set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, in special figure 1 and special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, using the table for each MODE, the design classification is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol types are the above-mentioned missing design, 2R probability variation design, 4R probability variation design, 8R probability variation design, and 16R probability variation design.

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

Effect control device 300, special figure type (special figure 1
Or special figure 2) determines whether it is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in the production, such as when a pattern-based command of a probability variable pattern is received even though a variation-based command that is out of line is received. If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"),
Terminates variable command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1
904), a variable effect setting process for setting a variable effect is executed (B1905). note that,
There are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of read-ahead effects such as continuous effects is 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 99) described above will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), set the model code, special figure type, first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the production mode (B2002), variation system command (
Acquire the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is obtained.

Production control device 300, if the fluctuation pattern type is not a reach-less fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is a reach fluctuation, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, the first half corresponding to the pattern type Set the advance notice distribution group address table (B2004),
The address of the first half advance notice allocation group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the variation pattern type is acquired (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Subsequently, the second half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, production mode, and pattern type is set (B2007
), acquires the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the fluctuation command (B2008), and performs a lottery for the notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) (B2009)
). After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010). In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, the stop pattern of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the content of the variable performance such as the reach performance and the notice performance (B2012). Here, the decorative stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the loose stitches in the case of a lost pattern.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B2013). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (B20
13 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B2015. If the power failure restoration display is being displayed (result of B2013 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the current change relates to the main display pattern (B2014). It should be noted that the current variation is a decoration special figure variation display game executed by the current variation command. For example, when the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is displayed in a large enlargement (normal display) at the center of the display device 41, the special figure 1 is the main display.

If the current variation is related to the pattern that is the main display (the result of B2014 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the variable effect (B2015), and performs display setting of the notice effect. (B2016). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (B2017), and the voice number that determines the performance mode by the speaker and the decoration number that determines the performance operation of the decoration device are set (B2018).

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2019), when there is a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) in addition to the above-described first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed. (B20
20). Incidentally, the fourth symbol variation may be displayed by an LED other than the display device 41. FIG.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is "Y"), and when the current fluctuation is not related to the pattern that is the main display (B
The result of 2014 is "N"), that is, if the current change is a change during power failure restoration display and is related to a pattern displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the display device 41, a flashy effect is not performed. Display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure classification is performed without performing the setting (processing of B2015 to B2018) such as the variation presentation and the notice presentation (B2019).

[Modified example of control of production control device]
Below, the modification of control (processing) of an effect|presentation control apparatus is demonstrated. Configurations other than those described below are the same as the aforementioned control (processing) of the effect control device.

[Variation Interruption Setting Process (Modified Example)]
A modification of the above-described fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation interruption setting process according to the modification. FIG. 101 is obtained by deleting steps B1402, B1403, B1410 and B1415 from FIG. 94 and adding steps T2115, T2116, T2117 and T2118. Figure 10
1, the same step numbers (symbols) are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 94, and the description thereof is omitted.

The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is in a low probability state (B14
If the result of 08 is "Y") and the result of the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (B
The result of 1409 is "N"), and the freeze display setting of the effect during variation of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is performed (T2115). The production during fluctuation includes the above-mentioned fluctuation production and advance notice production. Freezing includes, for example, freezing (stopping) of a movie (moving image). Here, you may also set display settings for a series of movies up to freezing. Subsequently, the display setting of superimposed images for freeze effects (such as movie display of characters, etc.) to be displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2116).
).

In addition, the effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 interruption command is not in a low probability state (
If the result of B1413 is "N") and the result of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is "N"), the freeze display of the effect during the fluctuation of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game Settings are made (T2117). The production during fluctuation includes the above-mentioned fluctuation production and advance notice production. Freezing includes, for example, freezing (stopping) of a movie (moving image). Here, you may also set display settings for a series of movies up to freezing. Subsequently, the display setting of the superimposed image for freeze effect to be displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2118).

In the above, after receiving the decoration special figure interruption command, it was made to perform freeze production,
Based on the look-ahead system command, it is possible to produce an effect before receiving the decoration special figure interruption command, and to make an effect like freezing at the same time as the decoration special figure interruption command is received, the interest may be enhanced.

[Variable restart setting process (modified example)]
A modification of the variable restart setting process (B1326) described above will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variable restart setting processing according to the modification. FIG. 102 shows step T2 instead of steps B1505-B1507 and B1510-B1512 of FIG.
210-T2215 and T2216-T2221 are included. In FIG. 102, the same step numbers (symbols) are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 95, and the description thereof is omitted.

Effect control device 300, after step B1504, sets the variation restart of decoration special figure 1 according to the probability state (restart of decoration special figure 1 variation display game) (T2210). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2211).
. If the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2211 is "Y"), set the variable restart of the decorative special figure 1 in the reduced pattern (reduced display) (restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) (T221
2).

Effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 resume command, if it is not during the display of the power failure recovery display (result of T2211 is "N"), the remaining fluctuation time determines whether it is a predetermined time or more ( T2213). When the remaining variable time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2213 is "Y"), display setting of rewind effect and reproduction speed are set (T2214), and the variable restart setting process ends. In addition, the rewind effect is performed once again at a fast reproduction speed in the display device 41, the effect before the interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. If the remaining variable time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2213 is "N"), the time for the rewinding effect is insufficient, so the display of the restart effect using the electric accessory and the setting of the accessory drive are performed (T2215). ), ending the variable restart setting process.

In addition, the decoration special figure 2 restart command effect control device 300 sets the fluctuation restart of the decoration special figure 2 (restart of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game) according to the probability state after step B1509 (T
2216). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2217). If the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2217 is "Y"), set the variable restart of the decorative special figure 2 in the reduced pattern (reduced display) (restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) (T2218 ).

If the effect control device 300 is not displaying the power failure recovery display (the result of T2217 is "N"
), and it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (T2219). When the remaining variable time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2219 is "Y"), display setting of rewind effect and reproduction speed are set (T2220), and the variable restart setting process ends. It should be noted that the rewind effect is the effect before the interruption of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game on the display device 41 again.
This is done at a fast playback speed. If the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (T2219
result is "N"), and since the time for the rewinding effect is insufficient, the display of the restart effect using the electric accessory and the setting of the accessory drive are performed (T2221), and the variable restart setting process is terminated.

[Action and effect of the first embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 103 to 110, effects of this embodiment (including modifications) will be described. 103 to 110, the special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game are abbreviated as special figure 1 game and special figure 2 game, respectively.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information on a display device based on establishment of a starting condition,
A predetermined game state (minor win state, big win state) in which a game value can be given to a player when the result mode of the variable display game is a predetermined result mode (win result mode including a small win result mode and a big win result mode). can be generated.

The special figure 1 game processing as the first control means executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning the first start prize opening 36). control. The special figure 2 game processing as the second control means is the establishment of the second start condition (for example, the second
Execution control of the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game) is performed based on the winning to the start winning port 37).

Both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be in a state of being executed (execution state). Then, when one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game has a winning result mode (predetermined result mode), the other variation display game is terminated and the other variation is performed. The display game may be set as a losing result mode (FIGS. 53 and 54).
, FIGS. 56A, 56B). As a result, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be prevented from becoming a hit result mode. In addition, if both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are stopped in the winning result mode, the gaming machine 10 performs the winning operation related to one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. I can't run it, so I have a problem.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 103, the process (FIGS. 53, 54, 55A, 55B) of stopping the variation display of one variation display game in the winning result mode (small winning result mode in FIG. 103)
), the process of forcibly ending the variable display of the other variable display game in a losing result mode can be executed (FIGS. 53, 54, 56A and 56B). This allows the other variable display game to continue as long as possible. In addition, the other variable display game is not newly started until the predetermined game state (small win state, big win state) that occurs when one of the variable display games is in the winning result mode is completed (special figure 1 in FIG. 35). Normal processing, special figure 2 normal processing in FIG. 36). As a result, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be prevented from becoming a hit result mode.

Also, as in the time chart of FIG. 104, when one of the variation display games is in the winning result mode (small winning result mode in FIG. 104), the execution time (variation time) of the other variation display game is timed (measured). ), the other variable display game may be interrupted by stopping the update of the special game processing timer (clocking means) (modifications of FIGS. 82, 83, 84 and 85). When the predetermined game state that occurs when one of the variable display games becomes a hit result mode ends, the other variable display game can be restarted by restarting the update of the special game processing timer (clocking means) (Fig. 82). , FIGS. 83 and 86 to 89). As shown in the shaded area in FIG. 104, the other variable display game after resuming can be executed for the remaining variable time (remaining time of the timer) after the interruption.

In addition, since the other variation display game can be restarted even if it is interrupted, unlike the case where the game is forcibly stopped with a losing result mode, if the other variation display game results in a winning result, the other variation display game can be resumed after the restart. A predetermined game state (minor win state, big win state) can be generated by the display game, and a problem that the profit of the player is lost can be prevented. For example, if one variation display game derives a small win result mode while the other variation display game is being executed in a big win result mode, the other variation display game is interrupted, but the small win game by one variation display game is executed. When the state ends, the other variable display game can be resumed to derive the jackpot result aspect.

Furthermore, when executing the process of stopping the variable display of one variable display game in a hit result mode, the process of interrupting the variable display of the other variable display game is executed. can continue. If the identification information of the other variable display game is variably displayed while the other variable display game is suspended, the apparent variation can be continued, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The game control program (game control program) stored in the storage means (ROM 111b) of the game control means (game control device 100) includes main processing and timer interrupt processing for the main processing. Note that the present embodiment can be applied to other interrupt processing instead of timer interrupt processing. In the same timer interrupt process, the special figure 1 game process (first control means, first control process) has priority over the special figure 2 game process (second control means, second control process), and the special figure 1 game Special figure 2 game processing is executed after processing.

As in the time chart of FIG. 105 (a), when the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a hit result mode and the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 83) Since the game processing timer cannot be updated, the special figure 2 that measures the execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game
The game processing timer (timing means) is updated by one interrupt period (4 msec) (step A8416 in FIG. 84). As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the restart of the fluctuation is executed extra for one time of the interruption cycle. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105(b), when the timer is not updated, the total fluctuation time (t1 before interruption + t2 after interruption) is reduced by 1 of the interrupt cycle. Batch time (4ms
The total fluctuation time increases by ec). On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a hit result mode and interrupts the special figure 1 variation display game, there is no need to update the timer for measuring the execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 106(a), the predetermined game state (small hit game state in FIG. 106) that occurs when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 106) is When ending, the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not delayed for a predetermined time (wait time) by a delay timer (delay means) (FIGS. 87 and 89). On the other hand, Figure 1
As in the time chart of 06 (b), when the predetermined game state that occurs when the special figure 1 variation display game is in the winning result mode ends, the special figure 2 variation display game is restarted by a delay timer (delay means). (S86
21, S8814 in FIG. 88). By setting the delay timer, the special figure 2 variation display game can be restarted simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 variation display game in timer interrupt processing after the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game.

Also, as in the time chart of FIG. 107 (a), regardless of the state of the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game (stopped state, apparent variation state during interruption, etc.), the special figure 2 variation display game A delay timer (8 msec wait time) may be set. As a result, in the timer interrupt processing for performing the end processing of the predetermined game state (hit end processing in FIGS. 67, 72, 86, and 88) occurring when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the winning result mode, The special figure 2 fluctuation display game by special figure 2 game processing cannot be started (FIGS. 33 and 83). Then, if the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in the timer interrupt processing after the end processing of the predetermined game state, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing are performed. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be started at the same time. In addition, at the timing of the end processing of the predetermined game state, special figure 1
If there is already a starting memory and a special figure 2 starting memory (in the case of accumulating a special figure 2 starting memory), or at this timing the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 If there is a prize, the first starting condition and the second starting condition are met.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 107(b), when the special figure 2 variation display game is in the winning result mode, even if the delay timer is not set, the timer interrupt processing after the end processing of the predetermined game state is performed. Within, if the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are started at the same time by the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. can.

Furthermore, when one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game stops in a hit result mode, the remaining variation display game of the other variation display game Processing corresponding to the variable time (value of the special game processing timer) may be performed (Fig. 8
4 S8412). In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are finished at the same timing and the winning result is derived at the same time.

For example, based on the remaining variable time of the other variable display game, the other variable display game
Same timing as one variable display game that stops in the winning result mode (within the same interrupt processing)
84 (S8412 in FIG. 84). Specifically, in the special figure 2 game processing executed after the special figure 1 game processing for stopping the special figure 1 variation display game in a winning result mode, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game can be 0. It is determined whether or not (determines whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec in the special figure 1 fluctuating process).

In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variation display game stops in the winning result mode, the special figure 2 variation display game If the result mode is a hit result mode, in the special figure 1 game processing (special figure 1 fluctuation processing in FIG. 84), suspend the special figure 2 fluctuation display game and postpone the stop of the fluctuation display. If the result mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the result mode, then in the special figure 2 game process (especially the special figure 2 fluctuation process in FIG. 85), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost in the result mode. Perform processing to stop.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108(a), in a situation where both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may lead to a winning result at substantially the same time, the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted. interrupt processing for postponing the stop of the variable display. And derivation of the hit result of the special figure 1 variation display game is given priority, and the hit state (hit operation) by the special figure 1 variation display game starts first. After the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is derived (the apparent fluctuation display during interruption is stopped), and the hit state by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (hit Since the action) starts, the player is not disadvantaged. note that,
During the hit state (hit action) by the special figure 2 variable display game, special figure 1 start memory (special figure 1 pending)
Even if there is, the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started (the result of A3501 in FIG. 35 is "N"
).

As in the time chart of FIG. 108 (b), the special figure 2 variation display game is the same timing as the special figure 1 variation display game that derives the winning result (small hit here) (within the same interrupt process)
In the case where there is a possibility of ending with , if the result mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the losing result mode, the process of stopping the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as it is in the losing result mode is performed.
Even if this deviation result mode is derived as it is, no problem occurs. When performing the process of stopping the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the losing result mode, the stop display time of the losing result mode (the time from stopping until the losing result is determined) is set to the hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game If the game is set to be the same as the stop display time of the mode (the time from when the game is stopped until the winning result is determined (start of fanfare)), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Also, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 109 and 110, the game control device 100 (game control means), when a power failure occurs during interruption of the other variable display game and restores the power failure (turns on the power), After restoration (at the time of restoration or after restoration), before the execution control of one of the variable display games is started, the effect control device issues an interrupting command (interrupting command) indicating that the other variable display game is being interrupted. 300 (effect control means) (A1022 in FIG. 9B, FIG. 93
B1305 of A). The production control device 300 can grasp that the other variable display game is being suspended and one of the variable display games is in a winning state (during a winning operation) by the suspension command, and the decoration special figure of the one variable display game can be grasped. Corresponding processing such as processing for displaying winning symbols on the display device 41 (see recovery screen display 1 in FIGS. 109 and 110) can be performed.

The effect control device 300 may display a restoration screen (power outage restoration display) suggesting restoration of the power outage on the display device 41 when the power outage is restored. Then, if the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed in the main display (first display) is interrupted, after the power failure is restored, a command related to the control of the suspended decoration special figure fluctuation display game You may exit the recovery screen when you receive (command). Commands related to the control of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game include, for example, a variation command for starting the decoration special figure fluctuation display game (see FIG. 109), a decoration special figure stop command for stopping the decoration special figure fluctuation display game (see figure 110) and the like. When receiving a command related to the control of the decorative special figure variation display game on the side (reduced display side, second display side) displayed in a size different from the main display, the recovery screen is not terminated.

In the case of returning to the normal screen after finishing the recovery screen with the decorative special figure stop command, the default loose pattern may be used as the stop design. In the case of the winning stop symbol, the default winning symbol corresponding to the game value (the number of rounds, etc.) of the winning state may be used. The background of the normal screen may correspond to the probability state or the like.

There is a possibility of receiving a command related to the control of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game on the side other than the main display (reduced display side) before receiving the command related to the control of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game on the main display. However, if the recovery screen is terminated at that time, there is a possibility that a problem may occur. For example, even though it is in a low probability, if the recovery screen is ended and the normal screen is displayed in accordance with the start of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game that is displayed in a reduced size, the player will There is a risk of misidentification. Therefore, as shown in recovery screen display 2 in FIGS. 109 and 110,
Even if a command relating to the start of a new variation of the decoration special figure variation display game (here, decoration special figure 2) is received in a reduced display, it simply starts the variation display and does not end the recovery screen.

Start memory means (for example, game control device 100) stores the right to execute the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game as start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition. Is possible. Starting memory display control means (e.g. segment L in FIG. 75)
The ED editing process and the main process of FIG. 90) can notify the player by displaying the number of starting memories stored in the starting memory means in a predetermined starting memory display area of the display device or display. . Then, the effect control device 300 displays the number of starting memories and the variable display of the variable display game resumed after interruption in the recovery screen after recovery on the display device 41 normally (when the recovery screen is not being displayed). It may be displayed in a state with a higher degree of transparency than Note that if the apparent variable display is continued even during the interruption, the variable display that is continued during the interruption may also be displayed in a highly transparent state.
Also, in the recovery screen, the fluctuation display displayed in the main display may be shake fluctuation.

[Second embodiment]
A gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, the embodiment (configuration) common to the first embodiment is applicable unless otherwise specified.

[Game board]
FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 30a that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board body 3
A game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of 0a. gaming machine 10
is configured to shoot game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The center case 40 has an inflow port 40c to a warp passage 40a for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b in which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40a can roll. and are provided. Stage portion 4 of center case 40
Since 0b is arranged above the first starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 33, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b wins the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 33. It's getting easier. A lamp display device 80 is provided on the lower right side of the game area 32 . The lamp display device 80 displays the start memory number of each special figure variation display game.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 115) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal figure start gate 34,
A normal figure fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls to these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 115).

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning port (first start winning area) 36 for giving the starting condition of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a normal variable winning device 33 directly below it. is provided. The normal variable winning device 33 is provided with a movable member 33c that converts into a state in which game balls can flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. Movable member 33c
is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the prize in the normal variable prize winning device 33.例文帳に追加

In the second embodiment, unlike the prior art, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is executed by winning the winning opening (general electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 It is configured to be stored. Therefore, the general power winning opening (first starting winning area) is the first starting winning opening 3
6 category, the general electric winning opening switch is the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 115)
included in the category of That is, the general electric prize winning port and the first start prize winning port 36 correspond to a plurality of first start prize winning regions. It is configured as a normal variable prize winning device 33 having a movable member 33c that can be converted into a variable.

In the second embodiment, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls to convert the movable member 33c of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 33 between the open state and the closed state based on the predetermined lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. is connected to the general electric solenoid 33b (conversion control means) that performs the conversion (see FIG. 115). The movable member 33c of the normal variable winning device 33 is an attacker-type normal electric accessory that opens the normal electric winning opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the normal electric solenoid 33b. In addition, as the movable member 33c of the normal variable winning device 33, the movable member 33c is slid forward and backward by the normal electric solenoid 33b, so that the game ball can flow into the normal electric winning opening. You may provide an ordinary electric accessory. Game control device 100
When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the movable member 33c is rotated and opened via the general electric solenoid 33b, and the game ball can flow into the normal fluctuation prize winning device 33. open state.

In addition, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, or normal A time-saving state (general electric support (electricity support) state) is generated by making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the game state.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40, a second start winning opening (second starting winning area) 37 for giving the start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. In addition, a first special variable winning device (lower large winning port) 38 is provided to the left of the second starting winning port 37, and a second special variable winning device (upper A large winning opening) 39 is provided.

In the second embodiment, the first special variable prize winning device (lower big prize winning opening) 38 moves forward and backward a sliding door (opening/closing member) 38c, which is a tongue-shaped member, to play the big prize winning opening. Transforms into a state where spheres can flow in (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-77362). The first special variable prize winning device 38 changes the state of the large prize winning port from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large prize winning port. is provided with a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The second special variable winning device (upper big winning opening) 39 has a movable member 39c that rotates in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, thereby converting the state into a state in which game balls can easily flow in. When the movable member 39c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the special variable winning device 39.例文帳に追加
The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the state of the large prize winning port from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper special prize winning port, thereby allowing the player to is provided with a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result. In addition, in the second embodiment, the special game state includes a small win (first special game state) that can occur when a small win mode (first special result) occurs, and a big win mode (second special result). Possible jackpot (
second special game state).

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 1 based on the winning of the game ball to the general electric winning opening (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) It is possible to control the execution of a variable display game (first variable display game). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes first execution control means for performing such control.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a second starting winning port (second starting winning region)
It is possible to perform execution control of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to 37. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes second execution control means for performing such control.

In addition, as will be described later, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the jackpot (second special game state), a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (hit probability is high probability, and It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed with general power support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes specific game state generating means for performing such control.

general winning port 35, first starting winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, normal variable winning device 33,
, When the game ball wins the big winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38 and the big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 115) determines the type of winning winning opening The number of prize balls corresponding to . In addition, in the game area 32 below the normal variable prize winning device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that do not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.

A ball guiding section 850 is provided on the upper right of the second special variable winning device 39 . ball guiding part 8
50 is a member that rolls the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the game area 32 in the lateral direction and guides it to the second special variable winning device 39 or the like.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 59 for displaying information such as the current game state.

[Lamp indicator]
FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lamp display device 80 according to the second embodiment. The lamp display device 80 is a variable display (
It has a lamp display unit 1, 2 (LED) for executing flashing) and a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of starting memories (number of reservations) of each special figure fluctuation display game. Note that the lamp display device 80
is controlled by the effect control device 300.

The lamp display portions 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle as variable display. Collective display device 50
While the variation time of the variation display in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the general figure indicator 53 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp display unit 1 of the lamp display device 80, 2
is measured by the production control device 300.

Lamp display units 3 and 4 (decorative special figure 1 reserved LED1, decorative special figure 1 reserved LED2) display the decorative special figure 1 reserved number (first start memory number) depending on the off state, lighting state, and blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (decorative special figure 2 reserved LED 1, decorative special figure 2 reserved LED 2) display the decorative special figure 2 reserved number (second start memory number) depending on the off state, lighting state, and blinking state indicate.

The flashing cycle of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 (the fourth special pattern described later) and the flashing cycle of the lamp display part 3-6 (decorative special pattern reserved) are both the same 200msec (100msec on, 100m
sec off), but the flashing cycle may be varied so as to make it easier to distinguish between the decoration special symbol reservation and the fourth special symbol. Also, the ON/OFF (display/non-display) times of the lamp display section 1-6 may be varied.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the configuration of the collective display device 50 in the second embodiment. The collective display device 50 is a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator) (lamp D1) and a second special figure for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) etc. Fluctuation display section 52
(Special figure 2 indicator) (Lamp D2) and has. In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display portion 53 (lamps D3 to D7) that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of openings and closings of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) and the occurrence of the small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display. It has a memory display unit 54 (special figure 1 reservation display) (lamps D11-D14) for notifying the number of game start (hold) memories. In addition, the collective display device 50 has a normal pattern storage display unit 55 (normal pattern suspension display) (lamps D15-D16) for notifying the number of starting (holding) memories of the normal pattern fluctuation display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50 displays the first
A game state display portion 56 (first game state display, probability state display portion) (lamp D9) and a second game state display portion 57 (second game state display) (D17). Furthermore, the collective display device 50 includes a third game state display unit 58 (third game state display device) (lamps D8, D10, D18
). In addition, the collective display device 50 is a fourth game state display unit 59 (fourth game state display, interrupted state display unit) ( lamps D19, D20).

FIG. 114 shows various display units 53 to 58 that constitute the collective display device 50 in the second embodiment.
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of (lamps D3 to D20); The collective display device 50 includes various display units 5
The state of the game machine corresponding to the lighting mode of 3-57 is displayed. Round display portion 53 (lamp D
3-D7) lights up according to the number of rounds, and the memory display unit 54 (lamps D11-D14) lights up according to the pending number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 variable display game.

The general pattern storage display unit (D15-D16) 55 lights up according to the number of suspensions of the general pattern variation display game (the number of starting memories). In the first gaming state display section 56 (lamps D9 and D17), the lamp D9 lights up in a high probability state and the lamp D9 goes out in a low probability state. The lamp D17 of the second game state display portion 57 (lamp D17) lights up when the player hits to the right, and the lamp D17 goes off when the player hits to the left. Each lamp of the third game state display section 58 (lamps D8, D10, D18) turns on/off/blinks according to the lottery result of the normal pattern variation display game. In addition, in 1 per normal figure, 2 per normal figure, and 3 per normal figure shown in FIG. can be done.

In the fourth game state display unit 59 (lamps D19-D20), D19 lights up while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted, and D20 lights up while the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted. In this case, an interruption signal may be output as external information.

[Game control device]
FIG. 115 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control system of the game control device 100 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, an example of the configuration of the control system of the game control device 100 in the second embodiment will be described. Unless otherwise specified, the configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the gate switch 34a for the game control device 100 of the first embodiment
is provided. The gate switch 34 is an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121
connected to The gate switch 34a detects winning to the normal figure starting gate 34. FIG. Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, with respect to the game control apparatus 100 of 1st Embodiment, the general electric solenoid 33b
is provided. The common solenoid 33b is connected to the first driver 138a.

Then, as will be described later, when the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the game control device 100 drives the general electric solenoid 33b to move the movable member 33c for a predetermined time. It is rotated (eg, for 0.3 seconds) to open and change to an open state in which game balls easily flow into the normal variable prize winning device 33 .

In addition, in the second embodiment, as described above, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning is executed by winning to the winning opening (general electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 It has a configuration in which memory is stored. Therefore, the general electrical winning opening switch is the start opening 1 switch 36
It shall be included in the category of a.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing game state transitions in the second embodiment. FIG. 116 summarizes each game state,
Control by the game control device 100 in each game state, control by the effect control device 300, and features in the game state are shown. In the second embodiment, the game state is
There are a normal game state, a first specific game state, a second specific game state, and a third specific game state.

First, each game state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100
The probability of hitting (hitting probability of special figure) is set to low probability, and control is performed so that there is no general electric support (electric support). Also, in the normal game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode. Also, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended as the shooting direction. Therefore, since the main starting area becomes the first starting winning port 36, the main fluctuation special figure becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

In the first specific game state, the game control device 100 performs control so that the probability of winning (the probability of winning a special figure) is high, and there is general electric support (the number of times of support is 50 times). That is, in the first specific game state, it can be said that the conversion control by the general electric solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is controlled to be executed more than in the normal game state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state. .

Also, in the first specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the variable probability mode. Also, in the first specific game state, it is recommended that the shooting direction of the game ball is right-handed.
Since it becomes easier to win the normal figure starting gate 34 by hitting to the right, the main starting area becomes the winning opening of the normal variable winning device 33 (normal electric winning opening). In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variation display game is executed by winning the general electric winning opening, the main variation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variation display game.

In the second specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be high, and the general electric support is eliminated. That is, when the transition from the first specific game state described above to the second specific game state, general electric solenoid (conversion control means) 3
It can be said that the conversion control by 3b is returned to the same control as the normal game state, and the probability state of the special figure is set to the high probability state (FIG. 119).

Moreover, in the second specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to a small hit RU.
Let SH. As will be described later, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set to a short time in the second specific game state, it can be said that the small hit RUSH is likely to occur continuously in a short period of time. . Thus, in the second embodiment, when the second specific gaming state is executed, a small hit (first special result) is derived as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game) It is possible.

Also, in the second specific game state, it is recommended that the shooting direction of the game ball is right-handed. Therefore, the main starting area is the second starting winning port 37, and the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

In the third specific game state, the game control device 100 performs control so that the probability of winning (the probability of winning a special figure) is low, and there is general electric support (the number of times of support is 50 times). Also, in the third specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time saving mode. Also, in the third specific game state, it is recommended that the shooting direction of the game ball is right-handed. Since it becomes easier to win the normal figure starting gate 34 by hitting to the right, the main starting area becomes the winning opening of the normal variable winning device 33 (normal electric winning opening). In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variation display game is executed by winning the general electric winning opening, the main variation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variation display game.

Next, the transition (transition) from each game state will be described. Assume that a big hit (second special game state) occurs in the normal game state. When the jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot state ends, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the first specific game state. on the other hand,
When the jackpot is the normal jackpot in the normal game state, after the jackpot state ends, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the third specific game state.

When a normal jackpot occurs in the first specific game state, after the jackpot state ends, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the third specific game state. Further, when a variable probability big win occurs in the first specific game state, after the big win state ends, the game state shifts to the first specific game state again. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, when the general electric support ends without the occurrence of a big hit, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state ("high support regulation in FIG. 116 The number of times" ends. Note that "high support" indicates a state with a high probability of hitting and with an electric support).

That is, in the first specific game state, a big hit (second
Special game state) may be set as a condition (first transition condition), and a predetermined number of power support (execution of a variable display game) may be set as a condition (second transition condition). By doing so, for example, after the occurrence of a big hit (second special game state) in the normal game state, the first specific game state can occur, but in this first specific game state, the above-mentioned When the second transition condition is established, the second specific game state can occur.

In the second specific game state, when the big win is a variable probability big win, after the big win state ends, the game state shifts from the second specific game state to the first specific game state. On the other hand, when the jackpot is the normal jackpot in the second specific game state, after the jackpot state ends, the game state shifts from the second specific game state to the third specific game state. That is, in the second specific game state, as a transition condition to another game state, the occurrence of a big hit (second special game state) is a condition.

When the variable probability big win occurs in the third specific game state, after the big win state ends, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the first specific game state. Also, when a normal jackpot occurs in the third specific game state, after the jackpot state ends, the game state shifts to the third specific game state again. On the other hand, in the third specific game state, when the general electric support ends without the occurrence of a big hit, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the normal game state (the "low support specified number of times" in FIG. 116 is End". Note that "low support" means a state in which the probability of winning is low and there is an electric support).

Since the game state shifts in this way, the game state can be shifted from the normal game state to the first specific game state after the variable probability big hit occurs in the normal game state. In the first specific game state, the general electric support is executed and the hit probability is set to a high probability,
It is possible to easily generate a big hit. And the interest of a game can be improved.

Also, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific game state, in the second embodiment, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state. In the second specific game state, the general electric support is not executed, but by winning the second starting port 37, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed. Here, the small hit probability in the special figure 2 variation display game is set to a high probability unlike the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, in the second specific game state, it is possible to execute a "small win RUSH" mode in which small wins (first special game state) are frequently generated until the next big win occurs. And the jackpot (
Since it is possible to increase the number of payout balls in game states other than the second special game state), it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with novel game characteristics.

Also, in the first specific game state, there is general electric support, and in the second specific game state, there is no general electric support as in the normal game state, so a small hit (first special game state) can be executed at a good tempo.

In addition, by executing the special figure variation display game in a state in which the probability of a big hit in the second specific game state is high, a big win (second special game state) occurs at an appropriate timing, and the player enters another game state. transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an extreme increase in payout balls due to excessive continuation of the second specific game state.

Each process in the second embodiment will be described below. The processing added in the second embodiment and the processing that will be explained again for ease of understanding are denoted by "A****".
A” is followed by a number in the tens of thousands.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program) in the second embodiment. FIG. 117 is obtained by adding the processing of step A11311 between steps A1311 and A1312 in FIG. Therefore, steps A1301 to A1
Since the processing up to 311 and the processing from steps A1312 to A1315 are the same as in FIG. 12, the description is omitted.

At step A11311, the game control device 100 executes a normal pattern game process for performing a process related to the normal pattern fluctuation display game (A11311). In addition, the details of the general-purpose game processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 134 .

By doing so, in the second embodiment, it is possible to execute the normal pattern variation display game. Then, when the normal figure variation display game is in the winning mode, the special figure 1 variation display game is performed by opening the winning opening (general electric winning opening) of the normal varying winning apparatus 33 and winning the game ball in the normal electric winning opening. can be started.

In particular, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, general electric support is executed (see FIG. 116). In the first specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started frequently by the general electric support (electrical support), and the hit probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. be able to. In addition, even in the third specific game state, it is possible to make the special figure 1 variable display game frequently occur easily by general electric support.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 118A is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 118A is obtained by adding the processing of step A13718 after step A3717 in FIG. Therefore, from step A3701 A
Since the processing up to 3716 is the same as that in FIG. 37, the description is omitted.

Compared to the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, the content of the high probability fluctuation number update process (A3717) is partially different, and a new time saving fluctuation number update process (
A13718) has been added.

High probability fluctuation frequency update process (A3717) is a process of managing the execution frequency of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state hit probability. The time saving fluctuation number update process (A13718) is
This is the process of updating the number of time reduction fluctuations, checking the end of public electricity support, etc., and setting necessary information. Note that the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process (A37
17) and for details of the time-saving variation number update process (A13718), see FIGS. 120 and 1
21, respectively.

Thus, in the second embodiment, since the high probability fluctuation number update process (A3717) is executed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with a high support prescribed number of times.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process time saving fluctuation number update process (A13
718) is executed, it is possible to shift to the normal game state with a low support specified number of times.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal processing of the second embodiment will be described. Figure 118B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in the second embodiment. FIG. 118B is obtained by adding the processing of step A13809 after step A3808 in FIG. Therefore, from step A3801 A
Since the processing up to 3808 is the same as that in FIG. 38, the description is omitted.

High probability fluctuation number update process (A3808) is a process of managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state hit probability. The time saving fluctuation number update process (A13809) is
This is the process of updating the number of time reduction fluctuations, checking the end of public electricity support, etc., and setting necessary information. Note that the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process (A38
08) and for details of the time saving fluctuation number update process (A13809), see FIGS. 120 and 1
21, respectively.

Thus, in the second embodiment, since high probability fluctuation number update processing (A3808) is executed in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with a high support prescribed number of times.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process time saving fluctuation number update process (A13
809) is executed, it is possible to shift to the normal game state with a low support specified number of times.

FIG. 119 is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the losing probability, and the variable probability probability in the second embodiment. These tables show the big hit probability (the probability that the judgment result will be a big hit), the small hit probability (the probability that the judgment result will be a small hit), and the loss probability (the judgment result will be a loss). probability), and probability variable probability (variable inrush rate)
is shown for the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. FIG. 119(a)
indicates the probability in the low-probability state, FIG. 119(b) indicates the probability in the high-probability state, and FIG. 119(c) indicates the probability variable inrush rate.

Also in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability (jackpot occurrence probability) is, in a high probability state,
It is higher than the low probability state. Also, the small hit probability (probability of occurrence of a small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure the small hit probability to be high in a high probability state and to be low in a low probability state. For example, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variation display game may be set to "0" in the low probability state. Also, the loss probability (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a big hit mode (second special result) in the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) or the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game) is set to a low probability, and a high-probability state is set to a higher probability than the low-probability state.

In the second embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variation display in the special figure 2 variation display game. game, and the probability of losing is lower in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game than in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (in the high probability state, the probability of losing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is 0
is). Therefore, in the second specific game state, it is possible to generate a small hit with an extremely high probability by winning the second starting prize winning port 37 .

Also, as in FIG. 45 described above, in the low probability state, the second half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is long-term fluctuation (
long fluctuation). However, in the high probability state, since the second half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not set, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a normal fluctuation time fluctuation (short fluctuation compared to long fluctuation) become. As a result, in the second specific game state of the high probability state, a small hit occurs more frequently due to the special figure 2 variation display game than in the low probability state (small hit RUSH).

In the second embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, the variable probability state or the normal state. Fig. 119(c)
, the 16R probability variable entry rate is 2% for both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R probability variable entry rate is 60 for both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. %. That is, the probability variable inrush rate is set to 62%. Then, after the big hit is finished, the time saving of 50 rotations and the electric power support are executed.

In addition, as the 16R probability variable rush rate, for example, the special figure 1 variable display game is 2%, the special figure 2 variable display game is 40%, and the 4R probability variable rush rate is, for example, the special figure 1 variable display game is 60%
, 22% for the special figure 2 variation display game, the allocation of the number of rounds of the big hit in the probability variation state of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be set differently. With this configuration, if a variable probability big win is won in the small win RUSH mode, a large number of game balls can be obtained even during the big win game, so that more small wins are generated during the small win RUSH. In addition to improving the willingness to play the game of the player who intends to acquire the game ball by means of the game, the degree of expectation for winning the probability variable jackpot can also be improved.

In addition, since the occurrence of the variable probability big hit triggers the end of the small win RUSH mode, the occurrence of the variable probability big hit may reduce the player's willingness to play, but it is possible to acquire sufficient game balls even with this variable probability big hit. Therefore, while maintaining the player's desire to play, the small hit RUSH again
It becomes possible to give a new game motivation to rush into.

[High-probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, high probability fluctuation count update processing of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment (A3717 (special figure 1 fluctuation start processing), A3808 (special figure 2 fluctuation start processing))
will be described in detail. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the procedure of high-probability variation count update processing in the second embodiment. In the high-probability fluctuation number update process, the number of fluctuations of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high-probability state (here, the number of high-probability fluctuations as the number of remaining fluctuations) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A15101).
If it is not in the high probability state (if it is in the low probability state) (the result of A15101 is "N"), the high probability fluctuation frequency update process is terminated.

If the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A15101 is "Y"), the high probability fluctuation count indicating the remaining number of special figure fluctuation display games to be started in the high probability state is updated by -1 (1 is subtracted) (A15102). In addition, the initial value of the number of high probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high probability state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process described later) ). Also, special figure 1 variable display game or special figure 2
The number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1 when any of the fluctuation display games starts to fluctuate.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A15
103). If the number of high probability fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A15103 is "N"), that is,
When the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100
ends the high-probability fluctuation count update process. When the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A15103
result is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding high probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of RWM (A15104).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure high probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM (A15105), corresponding to the pattern (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that starts the fluctuation Set the high probability & short time no final fluctuation flag (A15106), and end the high probability fluctuation frequency update process. The high probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag will be described later.

In this way, by executing the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process in the second embodiment, the first
Second specific game state (high probability,
(especially A15105).

[Time saving fluctuation number update process]
Next, the details of the time saving variation frequency update process (A13718 (special figure 1 variation start process)) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the time reduction variation count update process in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is during time saving (state with low probability & electric support) (A15201). If it is not in the time saving (the result of A15201 is "N"), the time saving fluctuation number update process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is in the time saving mode (state with low probability & electric support) (A1520
The result of 1 is "Y"), update the number of time-saving fluctuations by -1 (subtract only 1) (A15202)
. In addition, the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations is the number of times of fluctuation in which the time-saving mode is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 jackpot end processing or special figure 2 in the second embodiment described later). jackpot end processing). Also, even if any of the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game starts to fluctuate, the time saving variation frequency is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A152
03). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A15203 is "N"), that is, if the time reduction mode continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100,
End the time saving fluctuation frequency update process. When the number of time saving fluctuations is 0 (the result of A15203 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding low probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of RWM (A15204).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM (A15205), corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that starts the fluctuation Set the low probability & time saving no final fluctuation flag (A15206), and end the time saving fluctuation number update process.

In this way, by executing the time-saving fluctuation number update process in the second embodiment, the third specific game state (low probability, with electric sapo) Appropriately normal game state (low probability, no electric sapo) ) (especially A15205).

As mentioned above, in 2nd Embodiment, while changing a part of high probability fluctuation|variation frequency|count process in 1st Embodiment, the time-saving fluctuation|variation frequency|count update process was added. Therefore, as a flag corresponding to the high probability final fluctuation flag in the first embodiment, the high probability & short time no final fluctuation flag (A
15106) and low probability & short time no final fluctuation flag (A15206) was introduced.

In order to deal with such changes, steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A5728, A5745, A5828, and A58 in the first embodiment are implemented in the second embodiment.
48 "High-probability final fluctuation?""Finalfluctuation" is the final fluctuation at which the low probability and time saving state ends, and when the low probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the final fluctuation of the low probability and time saving state has ended. In addition, when the high probability & no time saving final variation flag is set, it shall be determined that the final variation of the high probability and time saving state has ended.

Further, in the second embodiment, steps A2712 and A3514 in the first embodiment
, A3607, A5737, and A5837, "high probability?"

Also, in the second embodiment, "clear the high probability fluctuation frequency area" in step A5907 in the first embodiment is read as "clear the high probability fluctuation frequency area and the short time fluctuation frequency area". Further, in the second embodiment, step A590 in the first embodiment
9, "clear the high-probability final fluctuation flag area" should be read as "clear the final fluctuation flag area".

In addition, the "final change flag area" is a high probability & time saving final change flag area that stores a high probability & time saving final change flag, and a low probability & time saving no final change flag low probability &
Including time saving no final change flag area.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
The details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a first flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 123 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A16701), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A1670
2). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big win (off data of the big win 1 signal, off data of the big win 3 signal) in the external information output data area (A1670
3).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16704). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16705). Here, in the second embodiment, there are high-probability data (high-probability, with power supply) and low-probability data (low-probability, with power supply) as probability variation determination data. If the probability fluctuation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo) ("N" in step A16705), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of high probability & short working hours in the external information output data area. (A16706). On the other hand, when the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo) ("Y" in step A16705), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A16720. Processing after step A16720 will be described later.

After the processing of step A16706, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16707). Subsequently, the game control device 100
saves the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A1
6708). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal (firing position designation signal 1) regarding the instruction to hit to the right in the test signal output data area (A16709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the high probability number in the game state display number area (
A16710), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A1671
1) Save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A16712). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16713
), and save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower prize gate fraud monitoring organization flag area (A1671
4), clear the special figure status area (A16715).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16716). Thereby, in the first specific game state, it is possible to make the hit probability high and to perform the general electric support. And, in the first specific game state, it is possible to frequently execute the special figure 1 variable display game in a high probability state. Subsequently, save the initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations (for example, 50 times) in the high-probability fluctuation number area for holding the high-probability fluctuation number, and save the time-saving fluctuation number area for holding the time-saving fluctuation number. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16717). After that, save the probability information command (high probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16718), and set the special figure 2 game wait time value to the special figure 2 game Save in the processing timer area (A16719), and end the special figure 1 jackpot end processing.

In step A16705 described above, the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability,
If there is an electric sapo) ("Y" in step A16705), the game control device 100
saves the signal related to the start of low probability & short working hours in the external information output data area (A1
6720).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16721). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of low probability & short working hours in the test signal output data area (A16722). After that, the signal (firing position specifying signal 1) related to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (A1
6723).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (
A16724), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A1672
5) Save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A16726). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16727
), and save the fraud monitoring period flag in the lower prize gate fraud start period flag area (A1672
8), clear the special figure status area (A16729).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16730). Thereby, in the 3rd specific game state, it is possible to execute the general electric support and the time saving mode. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be generated frequently. Subsequently, save the initial value of the number of low-probability fluctuations (for example, 50 times) in the low-probability fluctuation number area for holding the number of low-probability fluctuations, and save the time-saving fluctuation number area for holding the number of time-saving fluctuations. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16731). After that, save the probability information (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16732)
, Save the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A16733
), the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

By doing so, after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)),
It is possible to shift to the first specific game state by setting the hit probability to a high probability and setting the general electric support as present. Also, after the special figure 1 jackpot ends, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo), set the hit probability to low probability and have normal electric support As, it is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
The details of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 is a first flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment. Also, FIG. 125 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 2 normal processing (A16801), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A1680
2). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot (off data of the jackpot 1 signal, off data of the jackpot 3 signal) in the external information output data area (A1680
3).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16804). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16805). Here, in the second embodiment, there are high-probability data (high-probability, with power supply) and low-probability data (low-probability, with power supply) as probability variation determination data. If the probability fluctuation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo) ("N" in step A16805), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving in the external information output data area. (A16806). On the other hand, when the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo) ("Y" in step A16805), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A16820. Processing after step A16820 will be described later.

After the processing of step A16806, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16807). Subsequently, the game control device 100
saves the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A1
6808). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal (firing position designation signal 1) regarding the instruction to hit to the right in the test signal output data area (A16809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the high probability number in the game state display number area (
A16810), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A1681
1) Save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A16812). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16813
), and save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower grand winning entrance fraud monitoring organization flag area (A1681
4), clear the special figure status area (A16815).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16816). Thereby, in the first specific game state, it is possible to make the hit probability high and to perform the general electric support. And, in the first specific game state, it is possible to frequently execute the special figure 1 variable display game in a high probability state. Subsequently, save the initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations (for example, 50 times) in the high-probability fluctuation number area for holding the high-probability fluctuation number, and save the time-saving fluctuation number area for holding the time-saving fluctuation number. saves the initial value (eg 50 times) of (A16817). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16818), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

In step A16805 described above, the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability,
If there is an electric sapo) ("Y" in step A16805), the game control device 100
saves the signal related to the start of low probability & short working hours in the external information output data area (A1
6820).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16821). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of low probability & short working hours in the test signal output data area (A16822). After that, the signal (firing position specifying signal 1) related to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (A1
6823).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (
A16824), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A1682
5) Save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A16826). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16827
), and save the fraud monitoring period flag in the lower prize gate fraud start period flag area (A1682
8), clear the special figure status area (A16829).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16830). Thereby, in the 3rd specific game state, it is possible to execute the general electric support and the time saving mode. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be generated frequently. Subsequently, save the initial value of the number of low-probability fluctuations (for example, 50 times) in the low-probability fluctuation number area for holding the number of low-probability fluctuations, and save the time-saving fluctuation number area for holding the number of time-saving fluctuations. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16831). After that, save the probability information (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16832)
, ends the special figure 2 jackpot end processing.

By doing so, after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)),
It is possible to shift to the first specific game state by setting the hit probability to a high probability and setting the general electric support as present. Also, after the special figure 2 jackpot, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo), the hit probability is set to low probability and there is a general electric support , can be shifted to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment
will be described in detail. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the second embodiment. FIG. 126 shows steps A7207 and A7 in FIG.
208, the processing of step A17207 is added. Therefore, the processing from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processing from steps A7208 to A7210 are the same as those in FIG. 72, so description thereof will be omitted.

At step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during working hours (A17207). And game control control equipment 100, when it decides that it is not in time saving (A1
If the result of step A7207 is "N"), the processing after step A7208 is executed. On the other hand, when it is during working hours (the result of A17207 is "Y"), the process after step A7210 is performed.

By doing so, when the hit probability is not in the high probability state and the time is not in the time saving state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the special figure 2 small hit end processing (A3321) in the special figure 2 game processing of the second embodiment
will be described in detail. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 127 shows steps A7308 and A7 in FIG.
309, the processing of step A17308 is added. Therefore, the processing from steps A7301 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to A7310 are the same as those in FIG. 73, so description thereof will be omitted.

At step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during working hours (A17308). And game control control equipment 100, when it decides that it is not in time saving (A1
The result of 7308 is "N]), the process after step A7309 is executed.On the other hand, when it is during time saving (the result of A17308 is "Y"), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

By doing so, when the hit probability is not in the high probability state and the time is not in the time saving state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing (modification in the second embodiment)]
A modification of the second embodiment of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 128 is a first flow chart showing a modification of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment. Also, FIG. 129 is a second flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment.

128 and 129 show step A19719 in the processing in FIGS. 122 and 123.
to A19723 and steps A19733 to A19737 are added. Therefore, steps A16701 to A16718 and step A1
The processing from 6720 to step A16732 is the same as that of FIGS. 122 and 123, so the description is omitted.

At step A19719, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (A19719). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of A19719 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19722), special figure The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19723), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of A19719 is "Y"), directs the decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (A19720), and the effect command setting process is executed (A
19721). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. After that, steps A19722 and A19 described above
The process of 723 is executed, and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is ended.

Moreover, in step A19733, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (A19733). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of A19703 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19736), special figure The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19737), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of A19733 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (A19734), and the effect command setting process is executed (A
19735). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. After that, steps A19736 and A19 described above
The processing of 737 is executed, and the special figure 1 jackpot end processing is ended.

Figures 128 and 129 show a modification of the special figure 1 jackpot end process in the first embodiment as the second
It can be said that it has been modified so as to be applicable to the embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modification of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect in the second embodiment is obtained. That is, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric sapo)) after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot, the hit probability is set to high probability. It is possible to move to the first specific game state with general electric support. In addition, after the special figure 1 jackpot, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo), set the hit probability to low probability and have normal electric support , can be shifted to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing (modification in the second embodiment)]
A modification of the second embodiment of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 130 is a first flow chart showing a modification of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment. Also, FIG. 131 is a second flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment.

130 and 131 show step A19819 in the processing in FIGS. 124 and 125.
to A19722 and steps A19833 to A19836 are added. Therefore, steps A16801 to A16818 and step A1
The processing from 6820 to step A16832 has the same contents as those in FIGS. 124 and 125, so description thereof is omitted.

At step A19819, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (A19819). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of A19819 is "N"), clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area where the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19822), special figure 2. End the jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of A19819 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (A19820), and the effect command setting process is executed (A
19821). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the processing of the above-mentioned step A19822 is executed, and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

At step A19833, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (A19833). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of A19833 is "N"), clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area where the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19836), special figure 2. End the jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of A19833 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (A19834), and the effect command setting process is executed (A
19835). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the process of step A19836 described above is executed, and the special figure 2 jackpot end process is ended.

Figures 130 and 131 show a modification of the special figure 2 jackpot end process in the first embodiment.
It can be said that it has been modified so as to be applicable to the embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modification of special figure 2 jackpot end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect in the second embodiment is obtained. That is, after the special figure 2 jackpot, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with general electric support)),
It is possible to shift to the first specific game state by setting the hit probability to a high probability and providing the general electric support. Also, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is low probability data (low probability, with general electricity support), the probability of hitting is set to low probability, and there is general electricity support, It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end process (variant example)]
Next, the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment
A modification of is explained. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process according to the modification. FIG. 132 shows step A7207 and step A in FIG.
7208 is added with the processing of step A17207. Therefore, the processing from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processing from steps A7208 to S8814 are the same as those in FIG. 88, and description thereof will be omitted.

At step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during working hours (A17207). Then, when the game control device 100 determines that it is not in the time saving (A
If the result of 17207 is "N"), the processing after step A7208 is executed. On the other hand, if it is during working hours (the result of A17207 is "Y"), the game control device 100 moves to step S881.
0 and subsequent processes are executed.

FIG. 132 can be said to be a modification of the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect is obtained. That is, by the above processing, when the hit probability is not in the high probability and the time is not in the short time, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, the special figure 2 small hit end processing (A3321) in the special figure 2 game processing of the second embodiment
A modification of is explained. Figure 133 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing which relates to the modification. FIG. 133 shows steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG.
The process of step A17308 is added between and. Therefore, step A73
The processing from 01 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to S8914 are the same as those in FIG. 89, so description thereof will be omitted.

At step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during working hours (A17308). Then, when the game control device 100 determines that it is not in the time saving (A
If the result of 17308 is "N"), the processing after step A7309 is executed. On the other hand, if it is in the time saving (result of A17308 is "Y"), the game control device 100, step A891
1 and subsequent steps are executed.

FIG. 133 can be said to be a modification of the modification of the special figure 2 small hit end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modification of the special figure 2 small hit end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect is obtained. That is, by the above processing, when the hit probability is not in the high probability state and the time is not in the time saving state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A11310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal game processing. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A17601). For more information on the gate switch monitoring process, see
will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 monitors the input from the general electrical winning opening switch that detects the winning (entering the ball) to the winning opening (general electrical winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. (A17602). It should be noted that, in the second embodiment, unlike the prior art, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored by winning to the general electric winning opening. Therefore, the general electric prize-winning port is included in the category of the first starting prize-winning port 36, and the general electric prize-winning port switch is included in the category of the starting port 1 switch 36a. The details of the general electric winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A17603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A17604).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A17604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired,
The general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number is set in the register (A17605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A17606).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and the game branch processing corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number is executed (A17607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A17607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the effect, To perform normal pattern normal processing, such as setting of information necessary for performing processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A17608). The details of the normal pattern normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 137 .

In addition, when the game processing number is "1" at step A17607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A17609). The details of the processing during normal pattern fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG. 139 .

Further, when the game processing number is "2" in step A17607, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 The setting of opening time and the processing during the normal diagram display that performs the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the normal diagram per is executed (A17610). The details of the processing during normal map display will be described later with reference to FIG. 140 .

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A17607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. The figure hit middle process is executed (A17611). For more information about processing in the middle of the normal map,
This will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A17607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern per end processing (A17612 ). The details of the normal figure remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 143 .

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A17607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A17608). (A17613). The details of the end processing per normal pattern will be described later with reference to FIG. 144 .

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A17614). After that, the symbol variation control processing relating to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A17615), and the normal symbol game processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A1760
4 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, step A1761
4 and subsequent steps are executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart of a procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A17601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A17701). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A17701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (A17702). Here, the right-handed game state is a jackpot state, a first specific game state, a second specific game state, and a third specific game state. If the game state is to hit to the right (the result of A17702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A17705. If the game state is not right-handed (result of A17702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A17703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A17704). The production control device 300 that receives the left-handed instruction notification command notifies (warning) to instruct to hit left.
is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the normal pattern reservation number and determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A17705). Game control device 100, when the number of normal pattern reservations is less than the upper limit (the result of A17705 is "Y"), updates the number of normal pattern reservations by +1 (A17706), corresponds to the number of normal pattern reservations after updating Then, the address of the random number storage area is calculated (A17707). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A17708), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area (A177
09), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (A17701
The result is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of normal drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (A17
If the result of 705 is "N"), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general/universal electric prize switch monitoring process (A17602) in the general/universal diagram game process will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general electric winning switch monitoring process. In addition, as described above, the general electric prize winning opening switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 115).

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, whether or not the normal pattern variation display game is in a winning state and the normal variation prize winning device 33 is executing opening operations a predetermined number of times. (A17801). Then, if the normal pattern is hit (the result of A17801 is "Y
”), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the general electric prize opening switch (A17802). If there is an input to the general electric prize winning opening switch (the result of A17802 is "Y"), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (A17803).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the count number of the general electric counter after updating to an upper limit value (for example,
6) is determined (A17804). Then, when the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A17804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded from the normal hit end pointer area in the RWM, Save in the control pointer area during the normal map hit (A17805).

Finally, the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared (A17806), and the general-purpose electric winning switch monitoring processing is terminated. In other words, if there is a normal electric prize above the upper limit during the hit state of the normal figure,
At that time, the value of winning end is saved in the process control pointer area during the normal pattern winning, and the normal variable winning device 33 is closed so that the winning state of the normal pattern ends in the middle.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the middle of the normal game (the result of A17801 is "N"), if it is determined that there is no input to the normal electric winning opening switch (the result of A17802 is "N") ), or if it is determined that the number of counts has not reached the upper limit (A178
04 result is "N"), the general electric prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A17608) in the general-purpose game processing will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal pattern normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (A17901
). If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A17901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per general pattern of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per general pattern of RWM. Load the per pattern random number from (for the number of reservations 1), and clear the general per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and the general per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) after loading to 0 (A17902 ).
In addition, whether the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, whether it is in a short time state (normal support state) (A17903). In addition, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251.

If the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A17903 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A179
04), if it is in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A17903 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 1) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern high probability (A17905), step A1
7906 processing is performed.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A17906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A17906 is "Y"), that is, if the win is lost, the process proceeds to step A17908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A17906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A17907).

If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A17907 is "Y"), that is, if it is a loss, the game control device 100 saves the loss information in the hit flag area (A1790
8). Furthermore, set the stop pattern number as the normal pattern stop pattern number (A17909),
Save the lost pattern information in the normal pattern stop pattern information area (A17910), step A179
14 processing.

The game control device 100 saves the winning information in the winning flag area when the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A17907 is "N"), that is, when winning (A17911),
The winning stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded winning pattern random number is set (A17912), and the winning stop pattern information corresponding to the winning stop pattern number is saved in the normal stop pattern information area (A1791
3), the process moves to step A17914. In addition, there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and in this embodiment, there are three (1 per normal pattern, 2 per normal pattern, 3 per normal pattern).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal pattern stop symbol area (A179
14), save the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A17915), shift the random number storage area per normal pattern (A17916), clear the empty area after the shift to 0 (A1
7917), and update the number of reserved charts by -1 (A17918).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one.
By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A17919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the general pattern game processing timer area (A
17920). For example, the variation time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and a probability of 40/
256 is allocated to 1500 msec, and the probability is 16/256 to 3000 msec. And, during normal figure fluctuation processing transition setting processing is executed (A17921), normal figure usual processing ends. It should be noted that the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (the result of A17901 is "Y"), sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern normal process (A17922
), and the processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (A17923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A17924), and the general pattern normal processing is terminated.

[Normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process]
FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process during normal pattern fluctuation. The normal pattern change process transition setting process is step A17921 in the normal pattern normal process shown in FIG.
is executed in

The game control device 100, first, "1" as the processing number for shifting to the processing during normal pattern fluctuation
(A18101), and save the process number in the normal game process number area (A181
02).

After that, the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the start of the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern 1
(A18103), and save the flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag region (A18104). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the timer for the flashing cycle of the normal map display, is saved in the normal map flashing control timer area (A18105
), save the initial value (here 0) in the general pattern fluctuation pattern number area (A18106). After that, the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation is terminated.

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the details of the processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A17609) in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "2" as the setting processing for shifting to the processing during normal game display (A18301), and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A18302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal pattern display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game on the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern game processing timer area (A18303). .

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the normal pattern fluctuation (turns off the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A18304). Then, the stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (A
18305), end the processing during normal pattern fluctuation.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (A17610) in the general-purpose map game processing will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during normal map display.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process (A18401), and clears the hit flag area of RWM (A1
8402). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information is set in the loaded winning flag (A18403).

The game control device 100, when the winning information is set in the winning flag (A1840
The result of 3 is "Y"), set the processing setting table during hitting (A18404), hit start pointer value corresponding to normal pattern stop pattern information (here, value according to each of 1, 2, 3 per normal pattern ) and save it in the control pointer area during the normal figure hit (A18405). Also, the hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, 3 per normal pattern)
is obtained and saved in the general pattern per end pointer area (A18406). Next, the general electric opening time corresponding to the general pattern stop pattern information (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per general pattern) is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A18407). By the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variable prize winning device 33 is set during the variable probability state or during the time saving state (during the general electricity support state), and for example, it is possible to open 3 times or 2 times.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "3
” (A18408), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A18
409). After that, save the signal related to the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern 1 hit signal is turned on) and the signal related to normal electric operation start (normal electric accessory 1 active signal is turned on) in the test signal output data area (A18410). Furthermore, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general electric solenoid 33b, ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (
A18411).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the general electric count number area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 (A18412), Clear the information in the memorized electric power fraud number area (A18413)
. Finally, a flag that defines the non-fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 33 is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A18414).

If the game control device 100 hits the hit flag and no information is set (A184
The result of 03 is "N"), and set "0" as the processing number for shifting to normal normal processing (
A18415), the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A18416). After that, save the fraud monitoring period flag in the electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (A18417).
, ends the normal map display process.

[Medium processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the processing (A17611) during the normal pattern per game in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during normal per pattern.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during normal per pattern (A186
01), it is determined whether or not the value of the loaded normal per pattern control pointer has reached the value of the normal per per pattern control pointer upper limit value area (the value of the end of the hit) (A18602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer during normal per pattern has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal per pattern (result of A18602 is "N"), control during per normal per pattern The pointer is updated by +1 (A18603). Furthermore, normal electric operation transition setting processing is executed (A18604), and processing during the normal pattern per is ended. The details of the normal electric operation transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (the value of the end of the hit) (the result of A18602 is "Y"), Without executing the process of updating (+1) the process control pointer area during the normal pattern hit in step A18603, the normal electric operation transition setting process is executed (A18604), and the process during the normal pattern hit ends.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (A18604) in the normal per normal process will be described. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. The normal electric operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal electric solenoid 33b for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 33, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the processing according to the value of the control pointer (A187
01). Here, the control pointer uses the value before being updated in step A18603. If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2 or 5, step A1870
In order to move to the process of 2 and control the closing of the normal variable winning device 33, the wait time (for example, 300 msec) after closing the normal variable winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the normal game processing timer area. (A18702).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets OFF data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 33b (A18703), and ends the general electric operation transition setting process.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A18704 and controls the opening of the normal variable winning device 33.
General electric open time (for example,
1700 msec) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A18704). Furthermore, in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 33b, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area (A18705), and the general electric operation shift setting process is terminated.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer is 6, the game control device 100, step A1
In order to shift to the process of 8706 and control the opening of the normal variable winning device 33, the general electric opening time (for example, 2600 ms
c) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A18706). Furthermore, in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 33b, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area (A1
8707), the normal electric operation shift setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the game control device 100
sets "4" as the processing number in order to move to step A18708 to end the opening control of the normal variable winning device 33 and execute the normal electric remaining ball processing (A17612) (A187
08), the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A18709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (A18710). After that, in order to turn off the common solenoid 33b, the OFF data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (A187
11), the normal electric operation shift setting process is terminated.

[Public electric residual bulb treatment]
Next, the details of the general electric remaining ball processing (A17612) in the general electric game processing will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric residual bulb processing.

Game control device 100, first, sets the processing number "5" related to the end processing per normal pattern (A1
8901), and save the process number in the normal game process number area (A18902). After that, the general pattern ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A18903).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 33 (turns off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A18904).
. Subsequently, clear the general electrical count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 (
A18905), and clear the control pointer area in the normal per figure (A18906).
After that, the end pointer area per normal figure is cleared (A18907), and the normal electric remaining ball processing is terminated.

[End processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the general pattern per end process (A17613) in the general pattern game process will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the per-universal pattern end process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "0" relating to the general pattern normal processing (A191
01), and save the process number in the normal game process number area (A19102). After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal pattern variation game (the signal during normal pattern 1 hit is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A19103).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a flag (in-fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 33 in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A19104).
, After that, end processing per normal pattern ends.

[Action and effect of the second embodiment]
Hereinafter, the effects of the second embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 145 is a time chart of the operation of the first special variable winning device 38 in the small hit RUSH. In FIG. 145, in order to explain the operation of the first special variable winning device 38 in the second specific game state, the execution state and stop state of the special figure 2 variation display game (described as "special figure 2 game"), The execution state of the small winning operation, the opening/closing state of the lower big winning opening (winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38), and the state of the game ball in the vicinity of the opening/closing door of the lower big winning opening are shown.

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, when generating a small win (first special game state), the sliding door (opening/closing member) 38c of the first special winning device 38 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Convert. The first special winning device 38 has a configuration in which the game ball stays on the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c when the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c is in the closed state. Furthermore, when the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c is in an open state, the game ball staying on the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c can win. As a result, even if the open state is a short hit, the opening and closing door (opening and closing member)
Many game balls can be won by winning the game balls staying in the 38c to the first special prize winning device 38, and the number of balls to be paid out can be efficiently increased in the second specific game state. It's becoming

In the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit RUS in the second specific game state
When H is generated, the variation is started every time the second start winning opening 37 is won. Figure 119 above
As shown, even in a low probability state or a high probability state, the small hit probability of special figure 2 is set extremely high, and in the second specific game state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Variation is set to short variation. Therefore, small winning operations will occur one after another.

When a small win occurs, the big winning opening is opened a plurality of times (for example, 8 times) for each small win. During the small winning operation (first special game state), the open state time of the lower big winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is set shorter than the closed state time. For example, while the closing time of the lower prize-winning opening is 1.2 seconds, the opening time can be set to 0.2 seconds.

The special variable winning device unit that constitutes the first special variable winning device 38 has a configuration that weakens the downward force of game balls on the opening/closing door 38c (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-77362).
As a result, game balls tend to stay on the opening/closing door 38c.

In such a configuration, when a small win RUSH occurs with a high frequency of small wins, the closed state time of the lower big prize winning port is set longer than the open state time, so that the closed state time is increased. of game balls can be retained on the opening/closing door 38c. After that, the opening/closing door 38c is opened, so that many game balls staying on the opening/closing door 38c are awarded to the lower prize winning opening at once. As a result, when a small hit RUSH occurs, a large number of prize balls can be awarded to the player.

By doing so, in the variable probability loop type gaming machine 10 as in the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a small hit RUSH in the second specific game state after exiting the first specific game state. , a new game property can be realized in which the more the game balls fit, the more game balls can be obtained.

Incidentally, referring to FIG. 145, a small hit occurs in a predetermined variation display game,
When a small hit occurs in a variable display game subsequent to the predetermined variable display game, a period for securing the flowing down and staying state of the game ball is secured by the variation period of the identification information in the next variable display game. be able to. As a result, when the small winning action continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the opening/closing door 38c by utilizing the fluctuation time of the subsequent game. Then, many game balls staying on the opening/closing door 38c are made to be awarded at once to the lower prize winning opening, and many prize balls can be given to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, after the big win (second special game state) is over, when the variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific game state, a small win mode ( Since the transition is made to the second specific game state from which the first special result) can be derived, it is possible to perform novel game state transitions that have not existed in the past. Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is possible to efficiently vary the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game) in which many small hits are allocated.

[Third Embodiment]
A gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the following description, the configuration common to the second embodiment can be applied unless otherwise specified. It should be noted that configurations common to those of the first embodiment can be applied to configurations not described in the second and third embodiments.

3rd Embodiment is related with the small hit production|presentation which alert|reports generation|occurrence|production of a small hit state. In particular, the small win effect includes a blessing effect of congratulating and notifying the occurrence of a small win. The blessing effect does not include the display of the stop symbol for the small win (stop display for the small win) itself.

In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a small winning result (small winning mode, first special result, first winning result), a small winning state (first special game state) occurs. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big win result (big win mode, second special result, second win result), a game value (balls output, number of acquired balls) more advantageous to the player than in a small win state is provided. Grantable jackpot state (second
special game state) occurs.

In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is longer in the big win state than in the small win state, the game is played more in the big win state (second special game state) than in the small win state (first special game state). The game value (the number of balls to be played and the number of balls to be obtained) that can be acquired by a player is large, and the game value that is more advantageous to the player than in the small winning state can be imparted to the player. Since the big winning opening is open in both the small winning state and the big winning state, the small winning state is called the first special game state, and the big winning state is called the second special game state in the present embodiment. .

In addition, for the small hits, there are normal small wins (normal small wins) in which small wins occur according to the results of the main variation display game, and irregular small wins in which the small wins occur according to the results of the secondary variation display game. There is a hit. In addition, the big wins include normal big wins in which a big win state occurs according to the big win result of the main variable display game, and irregular big wins in which a big win state occurs according to the big win result of the sub-variation display game.

Here, the main variation display game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main start area (main area, main start prize opening) where the game ball often enters, and the sub-variation display game is the main game ball. It is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the sub-starting area (sub-area, sub-starting prize opening) where less game balls enter than the starting area. As in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the primary variation display game and the secondary variation display game can be simultaneously (both) being executed (simultaneous variation possible).

As explained in FIG. 116, in the normal game state (first game state), the first start winning port 36 (first start area) becomes the main start area where game balls often enter, and the second start winning prize The mouth 37 (second starting area) becomes a sub-starting area in which game balls are less likely to enter than the main starting area. Then, the main variation display game becomes the special figure 1 variation display game, and the secondary variation display game becomes the special figure 2 variation display game.

Also, as described in FIG. 116, in the small hit RUSH state (second specific game state, second game state), the second start winning opening 37 (second start area) can enter the game ball. It becomes a large main starting area, and the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting area) becomes a sub-starting area in which game balls are less likely to enter than the main starting area. Then, the main variation display game becomes the special figure 2 variation display game, and the secondary variation display game becomes the special figure 1 variation display game. The small hit RUSH state (second specific game state) is a state in which the hit probability is high and there is no general electric support.

In addition, in the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a long fluctuation (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes), and entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36 is recommended. and,
Left-handed hitting that facilitates entry of the game ball into the first start prize-winning hole 36 is more advantageous to the player than right-handed hitting and is recommended. In the normal game state, the display device 41 can display a left-handed display for recommending the player to hit left-handed (display recommending entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 36). It should be noted that the left-handed hitting that shoots the game ball toward the left side of the game area 32 (first game area) is called the first shooting mode of the ball shooting device (shooting means), and the right side of the game area 32 (second game area). Hitting to the right is called the second firing mode of the ball launcher.

In a small hit RUSH state (small hit rush state), a small hit can be generated with an extremely high probability by winning a prize in the second start prize winning port 37, so that a game ball entering the second start prize winning port 37 is less likely to enter. Recommended. Then, hitting right (second firing mode), which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole 37, is more advantageous to the player than hitting left (first firing mode) and is recommended. In the small hit RUSH state, the display device 41 can display a right-handed display for recommending the player to hit right (a display that recommends entering the game ball into the second start winning hole 37).

Also, as described in FIG. 116, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, the game control device 100 has the general electric support, so the winning opening of the normal variable winning device 33 (the general electric winning ) is a main starting area where game balls often enter, and the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is a sub-starting area where game balls are less likely to enter than the main starting area. Become. Also, hitting with the right hand is more advantageous to the player than hitting with the left hand, and is recommended.

In the first specific game state and the third specific game state, the main variable display game becomes a special figure 1 variable display game that is executed based on the entry of a ball into the general electrical winning opening (main start area), and the secondary variable. The display game is a special figure 1 variable display game that is executed based on the ball entering the first start winning opening 36 (secondary starting area), or the second starting winning opening 37 (secondary starting area). It becomes a special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is executed based on. In addition, the game control device 100 is information for determining whether the special figure 1 variable display game is executed based on which ball enters the first start winning opening 36 or the general electric winning opening (that is, the first Information on whether the game ball was detected by the starting opening 1 switch or the general electric winning opening switch of the starting winning opening 36) is included in the variation command (variation system command) or the decoration special figure 1 command (symbol system command), You may transmit to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG.

In summary, in the normal game state (first game state), it is recommended to enter the game ball into the first start winning opening 36 (first starting area), and the first starting winning opening 36 becomes the main starting area. ,
The second starting winning port 37 (second starting area) is a sub-starting area. In the small hit RUSH state (second game state), it is recommended to enter the game ball into the second starting winning port 37, and the second starting winning port 3
7 becomes the main starting area, and the first starting winning opening 36 becomes the sub-starting area. In addition, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, it is recommended to enter the game ball into the normal electric winning opening of the normal variable winning device 33, and the normal electric winning opening becomes the main starting area, The first starting prize-winning port 36 or the second starting prize-winning port 37 becomes the sub-starting region.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes information on the hit system command received most recently, information on the symbol system command received most recently (special figure type of B1801, symbol type of B1802), high support prescribed number of times (for example, 50 times), From the number of low support prescribed times (for example, 50 times), the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit, probability information (B1313), etc., the current game state is the normal game state,
It can be determined which of the small hit RUSH state, the first specific game state, and the third specific game state. It should be noted that the current game state can also be determined from production modes (B1318) such as normal mode, variable probability mode, time saving mode, small hit RUSH mode, etc. in FIG.

In this embodiment, the effect control device 300 continuously displays a left-handed display 656 (described later) on the display device 41 while the current game state is the normal game state, and the current game state is a small hit. State, jackpot state, first specific game state, small hit RUSH state (second specific game state), third specific game state, right-handed display 658 (described later) is continuously displayed on the display device 4
1.

[Processing of winning commands]
FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the procedure of winning command processing according to the third embodiment. The effect control device 300 executes the winning system command process (B1208) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command indicates fanfare (B2101). The winning command is a fanfare command (A
5714, A5814) or small hit fanfare command (A5735, A5835)
, the MODE part represents the fanfare. The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for the big win. In addition, the round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part of the winning system command represents fanfare (B
The result of 2101 is "Y"), whether or not the winning system command is due to an irregular small winning, that is, whether or not the winning system command is a small winning fanfare command received due to the occurrence of an irregular small winning. Determine (B2102).

The effect control device 300, if the hit system command is not due to the irregular small hit (
If the result of B2102 is "N"), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect is executed (B2103). The fanfare performance becomes a small win fanfare performance when a small win fanfare command is received, or a big win fanfare performance when a fanfare command is received. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "under fanfare" (B2104),
Terminates hit command processing.

In addition, as described above, the irregular small hit is when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game started based on the winning (entering ball) of the game ball to the secondary start area (secondary area) is a small hit. Say a small hit. In addition, the effect control device 300, for example, a special figure variation display game of a special figure type (for example, special figure 2) different from the main variation display game (for example, special figure 1 variation display game) corresponding to the current gaming state is a small hit. When it becomes, it can be determined as an irregular small hit.

On the other hand, when the winning system command is for an irregular small win (the result of B2102 is "Y"), the production control device 300 does not set the fanfare production and does not execute the small winning fanfare production in step B2104. process.

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents a round ( B2105). Win command is round command (A6102
) or a small hit open command (A6902, A6909, A6916, A6923), the MODE part represents a round.

If the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2105 is "Y"), the effect control device 300
), it is determined whether or not the winning system command is due to an irregular small winning, that is, whether or not the winning system command is a small winning opening command received due to the occurrence of an irregular small winning (B2106). If the hit command is not due to an irregular small hit (B
The result of 2106 is "N"), the round effect setting process for setting the round effect is executed (
B2107). The round production is a small winning medium production during the opening of the big winning mouth due to the small winning when the command for opening the small winning is received, or a big winning round production during the big winning round when the round command is received. . Subsequently, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P
Machine state) is set to the game state flag indicating that the round is in progress (B2108), and the win system command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit (the result of B2106 is "Y"), the production control device 300 does not set the round production, does not execute the production during the small win, and step B2108. process.

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent a round (the result of B2105 is "N"), the effect control device 300 changes the MOD of the hit-related command.
It is determined whether or not the E part represents an interval (B2109). If the win-related command is an interval command, the MODE section indicates the interval. In addition, in this embodiment, in the small hit, the big winning opening is opened only once (see FIG. 69), that is,
There is no interval command because the small hit is one round. However, even with a small hit, an interval command exists in a configuration in which the big winning opening is opened and closed multiple times.

If the MODE part represents an interval (the result of B2109 is "
Y"), determines whether or not the winning-related command is due to an irregular small winning, that is, whether or not the winning-related command is a command received due to the occurrence of an irregular small winning (
B2110). If the hit system command is not due to irregular small hits (B2110
result is "N"), an interval effect setting process for setting the interval effect of a big win (or a small win) is executed, and the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 indicates that the interval is in progress. Set (B2111, B2112), and end the win system command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE portion of the received hit-related command does not represent the interval (the result of B2109 is "N"), determines whether the MODE portion of the hit-related command represents the ending ( B2113). The winning command is the ending command (A6
307) or if it is a small hit end screen command (A7001), the MODE part represents the ending.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part of the hit system command represents the ending (B2
The result of 113 is "Y"), whether or not the winning system command is due to the irregular small winning, that is, whether or not the winning system command is the small winning end screen command received due to the occurrence of the irregular small winning. is determined (B2114). If the winning system command is not due to the irregular small winning (the result of B2114 is "N"), the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect is executed (B2115). The ending production is a small winning ending production (small winning end screen display production) at the end of the small winning when a small winning end screen command is received, and a big winning ending at the end of the big winning when the ending command is received. It becomes production (display production of the big hit end screen). The game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "ending" (B2116), and the win system command processing is terminated.

The effect control device 300, when the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit (
If the result of B2114 is "Y"), the processing of step B2116 is executed without setting the small winning ending effect and not executing the display effect of the small winning end screen.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part of the received hit system command does not indicate the ending (the result of B2113 is "N"), ends the hit system command process without executing any process.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small-hit fanfare production, medium-small-hit production, small-hit interval production, and small-hit ending production are collectively referred to as small-hit production. A small hit production is a production that is executed due to a small hit. In addition, the above-mentioned jackpot fanfare production, jackpot round production,
The jackpot interval production and the jackpot ending production are collectively referred to as the jackpot production.

FIG. 147A is a table exemplifying the presence/absence of a small winning effect and a big winning effect by such a winning system command process with respect to the normal game state (left-handed state). FIG. 147B shows whether or not there is a small hit effect and a big hit effect by the hit system command processing, a small hit RUSH state (right hitting state)
is a table illustrating for.

In addition, in the normal game state, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the main variation display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the secondary variation display game. In the small hit RUSH state, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the main variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the secondary variation display game.

In FIGS. 147A and 147B, when the result of the main variation display game is a small hit result in the first period, which is the display time of the stop symbol, in the second period after the first period, a small hit effect (small Winning fanfare effect, small winning medium effect, small winning ending effect, etc.) are executed. On the other hand, in the first period, if the result of the sub-variation display game is a small winning result, the small winning effect is not executed in the second period after the first period. Here, the second period is
It is the continuation period of the small hit state.

Then, only when the result of the main variation display game is a small win result (in the case of a normal small win), as a part of the small win production, a blessing performance for congratulating and notifying the occurrence of the small win state is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the secondary variable display game is a small hit result (in the case of an irregular small hit)
Since the small hit production is not executed at this time, the blessing production is not executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in the original way of enjoying (hitting way, shooting mode) such as hitting the game ball aiming at the main starting area, and the loss of interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, when the blessing effect is executed in the case of an irregular small hit, the player tries to generate a large number of secondary variable display games, and launches the game ball aiming at the secondary start area where the game ball is not recommended to enter. In addition to being unable to enjoy the game in the recommended original way of enjoying (hitting way, shooting mode), there are many occurrences of erroneous hitting way notifications (such as "Please hit left"). Therefore, if the blessing effect is executed in the case of the irregular small win, there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease.

Further, in FIGS. 147A and 147B, when the result of either the main variation display game or the sub-variation display game is a big hit result in the first period which is the display time of the stop symbols, the first
In the second period after the period, a big win effect (a big win fanfare effect, a big win round effect, an interval effect, a big win ending effect, etc.) is executed. In addition, here, the second period is the duration of the jackpot state. As types of jackpots, there are jackpot 1 and jackpot 2 according to the probability state after the jackpot ends and the number of rounds. For example, the jackpot 1 and jackpot 2 may be a normal jackpot and a variable probability jackpot, respectively, or may be a 4R jackpot and a 16R jackpot (see FIG. 119). Then, different big win effects (big win 1 effect, big win 2 effect) may be executed for each type of big win.

Also, in FIGS. 147A and 147B, in the first period, which is the display time of the stop symbols, if either or both of the main variation display game and the secondary variation display game result in a losing result, the first period In the subsequent second period, the effect corresponding to the losing result is not executed. In this case, if one of the primary variation display game and the secondary variation display game that are capable of being executed at the same time (both) is forced to stop due to a small hit result in the other game,
The second period is at least the continuation period of the small hit state. Further, when one of the primary variation display game and the secondary variation display game is forced to stop due to the result of a big hit in one of the games, the second
The period is at least the duration of the jackpot state. If the results of both the primary variation display game and the secondary variation display game are losing results, the second period is at least the period from the end of the first period to the start of any variation display game.

In the examples of FIGS. 146 and 147 above, in the irregular small win in which the sub-variation display game is a small win, a small win fanfare effect, a small win middle effect, and an interval effect (the big winning port is opened and closed multiple times). Only case), all the small hit effects of the small hit ending production are not executed. However, in the case of an irregular small hit, the small win fanfare production, small winning medium production, interval production, and small winning ending production (multiple possible) that do not include the blessing production will be performed during the duration of the small winning state It is also possible to configure it to run during two periods). For example, if the small hit ending production does not include the blessing production, even if the irregular small hit,
It is also possible to increase interest in the game by executing only a small winning ending effect for a relatively short time to report a small winning.

In the example of FIGS. 146 and 147, the big win effect is executed even in the irregular big win in which the sub-variation display game is a big win. However, in the case of irregular big wins, it is possible to configure such that only the blessing effect of congratulating and notifying the occurrence of the big win among the big win effects is not executed (the jackpot effects other than the blessing effect are executed).

By the way, in the third embodiment, unlike the first and second embodiments, the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 start memory) is configured to accumulate up to a predetermined number of 1 or more (for example, 4), and the special figure The special figure 2 start prize during execution of the 2 fluctuation display game or during the big hit is not invalidated. For this reason, special figure starting opening 2 switch processing, special figure 2 usual processing, and fluctuation start information setting processing are changed from the first embodiment and the second embodiment as follows.

[Special figure start gate 2 switch processing]
FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes a special figure starting opening 2 switch process (A2718) in the starting opening switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 loads the starting port 2 signal output count, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 37a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 (A3001). Furthermore, the value of the loaded start port 2 signal output count is updated by +1 (A3
002), and it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (A3003).

If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start port 2 signal output count area of RWM (A3004
). On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the update target special figure holding (start memory) number corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A3005). When the special figure reservation number is not less than the upper limit (the result of A3005 is "N"), the special figure start opening 2 switch processing is ended.

The game control device 100, when the number of special figures pending is less than the upper limit (the result of A3005 is "Y"), sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3006), updates the number of special figures 2 pending +1 (A3007). It should be noted that the special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting the variation information (including sorting of the look-ahead variation pattern).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the special figure 2 random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (A3008), stores the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process as the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (A3009). Subsequently, the jackpot pattern random number is extracted and prepared (A3010), and the jackpot pattern random number is saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A3
011). Further, a small winning design random number is extracted and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (A3012). Next, save the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas of the RWM (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) ( A3013).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure reservation information determination process (prefetching process, pre-determination process) for determining special figure reservation information (A3014), and a decoration special figure 2 reservation number indicating a special figure 2 reservation number Prepare a command (decorative special figure 2 reservation number command) as an effect command (A3015), execute the effect command setting process (A3016), and end the special figure start port 2 switch process. Thus, when the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory) occurs, the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

In the third embodiment, the special figure reservation information determination process is also executed for the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 Become.
Therefore, the prefetching pattern system command (prefetching stop pattern command) and the prefetching variation system command (prefetching variation pattern command) for the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 reservation) are the game control device 1
00 to the production control device 300.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 normal processing according to the third embodiment.
The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 normal process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process. In addition, the processing other than steps A3605a and A3605b is the same as the special figure 2 usual processing (FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

After the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3605), the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3605a). , effect command setting processing is executed (A3605b).

Therefore, in the third embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the fluctuation start information setting process (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. Note that step A5021,
Processing other than A5022 and A5023 is the fluctuation start information setting processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 50)
is the same as , and the description is omitted.

If the information is not set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is "N"),
That is, when information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 reservation number is updated by -1 (A5021), and the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 2 variable display game are shifted (A50
22), the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5023), and the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

[Screen transition 1]
151A and 151B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in relation to the third embodiment. show.

(A) of FIG. 151A is a display screen immediately before starting the special figure 1 variation display game (decorative special figure 1 variation display game) which is the main variation display game in the normal game state. In the variable display area 610 in the central part of the display screen, the losing stop symbols "3, 4, 6" of the previous special figure 1 variable display game are displayed in a large size. Also, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the stop symbols "3, 4, 6" of the previous special figure 1 variable display game are displayed small. In the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game), which is a subordinate variable display game in the normal game state, is variably displayed.

Further, in (a), the first predetermined image 675 indicating the execution state of the special figure 1 variation display game is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is stopped, and the special figure The second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the 2-variation display game is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 2-variation display game is being executed (during variation). The second predetermined image 676 “o” may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). In the first display unit 620 of the display screen, a special figure 1 reservation display 620a (special figure 1 start memory) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation (special figure 1 start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) 1 start memory display) are displayed. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 . In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 reservation number "4", and the special figure 2 reservation number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 reservation number "4". In addition, since it is a normal game state, a left-handed display 65 for recommending the player to play left-handed
6 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

Subsequently, in (a), both the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the secondary variation display game, are being executed. Also, the first predetermined image 675
is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is in progress, and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is in progress. It has become. The first predetermined image 675 "o" and the second predetermined image 676 "o" are the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).
may flash as

Also, in (a), in the first display unit 620, each special figure 1 reserved display 620a is moved to the display position of the special figure 1 reserved display 620a on the left (holding shift). Furthermore, the special figure 1 reserved display 620a located at the left end of the first display section 620 is moved from the first display section 620 to the reserved digestion area 6
Go to 40 (pending shift). The special figure 1 pending display 620a of the first display unit 620 is a starting memory display (pre-variation pending display) corresponding to the starting memory related to the fluctuation display game before execution, whereas the special figure of the pending digestion area 640 The 1 pending display 620a is a starting memory display (variable pending display) corresponding to the starting memory related to the variable display game being executed. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 reservation number "3", and the special figure 2 reservation number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 reservation number "4".

The special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is displayed in a plurality of modes (two modes) of a first display mode and a second display mode. Here, the first display mode is a display mode larger than the second display mode, and is a mode in which the main display is displayed large in the center of the display screen. This is a display mode in which a portion (here, the left end portion) is displayed small. That is, the fluctuating decoration pattern is a large pattern in the first display mode, and a small pattern in the second display mode. It should be noted that the first display mode may be a mode in which the decoration pattern is formed of characters, numbers, and frames and is variably displayed, and the second display mode may be a mode in which the decoration pattern is formed only by numbers and is variably displayed. .

The special figure 2 variation display game, which is a secondary variation display game, is displayed at the right end of the display screen as a sub display smaller than the special figure 1 variation display game in the first display mode as the main display. That is, the changing decoration pattern is a large pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the first display mode, and is a small pattern in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In the display mode (small pattern mode) of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative pattern (color and size may be different), or the decorative pattern of the same size as the special figure 1 variable display game in the second display mode (color and shape may be different), or the special feature of the second display mode A decoration pattern (the size may be different) of the same shape but different in color from that of the variable display game in FIG. 1 may be used. Here, the same size means that the vertical width and horizontal width are the same, or that the points (pt) of the characters (numbers) of the decoration pattern are the same.

After that, in (c), the result of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, is the result of the small hit, and the small hit pattern (small hit stop pattern) "7, 6, 7" is derived, and the display screen is displayed. It is displayed large as a large pattern at the top. The small hit here is a normal small hit. It should be noted that the small hit pattern "7, 6, 7" is first displayed large in the center of the display screen corresponding to the first display mode (main display) of the special figure 1 variable display game, and then, after that, the small hit fanfare It may be moved to the upper part of the display screen and displayed in a small size so as not to interfere with the production. Also, corresponding to the second display mode (sub-display) of the special figure 1 variable display game, the small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" is displayed small in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen.

In addition, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, becomes a small hit result, the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the secondary variation display game, is performed in the variation display area 615 at the right end of the display screen. The game is forcibly stopped (forced stop) as a result of losing, ie, losing symbols "1, 6, 7".

In addition, in (c), since it is a normal small win, a small win fanfare effect is executed at the center of the display screen as a small win effect. As part of the small hit fanfare production, the character display "
Congrats on the small win.” A blessing effect is executed to congratulate and notify the occurrence of the small win. note that,
As the congratulatory production, a production in which a character appears and congratulates may be executed. again,
As a small hit fanfare production, "Tiger mode" as a production mode corresponding to the small hit state
is reported as "entering tiger mode".

Then, since it is a small hit state, a right hit display 657 is displayed to recommend the player to hit right.
is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen in a large form (first form, maximum form), and a right-handed display 658 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen in a small form different from the right-handed display 657 (second form). aspect, minimum aspect). In addition, as described later, the right-handed display 657 and the right-handed display 6
58 is displayed on the display screen in the same manner even when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game results in a big hit result, but may be displayed in a different manner.

Note that the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "
The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 .

Subsequently, in (d), a small-hit middle production is executed in the center of the display screen as a small-hit production. The performance during the small hit is a performance corresponding to the performance mode "tiger mode". In addition, "tiger mode"
This mode may be set as one mode of the normal game state after the end of the small win, and since the mode continues, the mode name "tiger mode" may be displayed at the edge or corner of the display screen.
Also, although not shown, a small winning ending effect is executed at the end of the small winning state.

After that, in (E), the small hit state ends and the normal game state starts. The small winning symbols "7, 6, 7" displayed in the upper part of the display screen return to the central part of the display screen, are enlarged and displayed large, and then start to fluctuate. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613 by the main display and the sub-display. At the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a secondary variable display game, starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen.

In the first display unit 620, each special figure 1 reserved display 620a is the special figure 1 reserved display 62 on the left
It is moved to the display position of 0a (pending shift). Furthermore, the special figure 1 pending display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is moved from the first display unit 620 to the pending digestion area 640 and displayed as a variable pending display (holding shift). In addition, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "2", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "3
” is displayed.

Also, in (E), the first predetermined image 675 is that the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (varying)
The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (during variation). First predetermined image 675 "
◯” and the second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). In addition, since the small win state is over and the normal game state is entered, a left-hand hitting display 656 for recommending the player to hit left-hand is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

The following (f) is the same state as (b) except for the number of pending.

After that, in (G), the result of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is a secondary variation display game, is the result of the small hit, the small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" is derived, and the variation display area at the right end of the display screen. 61
5 is displayed small. On the other hand, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the secondary variation display game, is a small hit result, so that in the variation display area 610 in the center of the display screen and the variation display area 613 in the left end, in the main variation display game A certain special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped (forced stop) with a losing result (specific result), that is, a losing pattern "1, 5, 6". In addition, the winning symbols as the specified result of the variable display game are symbols other than the small winning symbols and the big winning symbols,
Including chance symbols and default symbols. The default symbol is a predetermined symbol ("1,
2, 3”, etc.). The chance symbol is a special losing symbol that can be displayed as a result of a plurality of variable display games in the continuous notice as the look-ahead effect.

In addition, in (g), the missing symbols "1, 5, 6" corresponding to the losing result (specific result) of the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the secondary variation display game(
Special figure 2 fluctuation display game) small hit result (first special result) corresponding to the small hit pattern "7, 6,
displayed larger than 7". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the main variation display game resulted in a small hit. Although the main variation display game is frequently executed, the result of a sudden small hit (small winning pattern) in the sub-variation display game which is not frequently executed.
conspicuously displayed, the player may misunderstand as if the main variation display game, which was displayed conspicuously, resulted in a small hit. In addition, although the small hit pattern has a regularity of numbers (here, two patterns "7" are aligned), it is difficult to understand the difference from the lost pattern, so the main fluctuation display game is small even though it is a lost pattern. It is easy to misunderstand that it is a hit.

Also, in (G), unlike (C), because of the irregular small hit, no small win production is executed including the blessing production to congratulate and notify the occurrence of the small win. In addition, the small-hit performance does not include the display itself of the small-hit symbol (small-hit stop symbol) "7, 6, 7". Since the blessing effect is not executed in the irregular small hit, the player enjoys the game in the recommended original way of enjoying, that is, in the way of hitting (shooting mode) aimed at the main starting area between left and right hitting. become.

Note that the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "
The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 .

Then, in (g), since it is a small hit state, only the right hitting display 658 is displayed in a small form (second form) in the lower right corner of the display screen in order to encourage the player to hit right. be done. The hitting to right display 657 (first aspect) is not displayed. In addition, when a small hit state due to an irregular small hit occurs in this way, the right hit display 658 is more conspicuous than the right hit display 657 (first mode) in a big hit state such as (J) described later. It is displayed in a small aspect (small aspect). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player misunderstands that the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game), which is displayed in a large size in the first display mode, is a small hit and a right-handed state has occurred.

In addition, in the case of such an irregular small hit, the display of the same contents as when the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) results in a losing result is displayed on the display device (see FIG. 15 described later).
2 (ta) (see also tsu)). As displays of common contents, special figure 1 reserved display 620a, special figure 1 reserved number display 650, special figure 2 reserved number display 660, special figure 1 variable display First showing the execution state of the game
There are a predetermined image 675 and a second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the special figure 2 variation display game.

In addition, as a display of common contents, although not shown, there is a character that appears when the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped (when the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed). In addition, the pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo variation that temporarily stops display (pseudo stop display) of the decorative special symbols that are displayed in a simulated manner from the start to the end of one special figure variation display game. This is an effect that is performed continuously for a predetermined number of times. note that,
In the temporary stop display, a pseudo continuous symbol suggesting continuation of the pseudo continuous effect is stop-displayed.

Due to the display of the above common contents, even if a small hit state occurs due to the secondary fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game), the player can enjoy the frequently appearing main fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). ), the user does not feel uncomfortable and is less likely to be confused by the small hit state caused by the sudden occurrence of the secondary variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game).

Also, in (G), a special figure 1 pending display 620a, which is a starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory that is the right to execute the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game), is displayed on the display screen. Therefore, even if the result of the sub-variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is a small hit result, the starting memory display for the main variation display game can be continued to be displayed on the display device.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent confusion by displaying the starting memory display for the sub-variation display game on the display device in response to the result of the sub-variation display game being a small win.

After that, in (h), the small winning state of the irregular small winning ends and the normal game state starts. A pending shift is executed, and the missing symbols "1, 5,
6” begins to fluctuate. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613 by the main display and the sub-display. At the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a secondary variable display game, starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen.

In addition, the game control device 100 is the time (irregular small hit digestion time ) is longer than the time from the start of the normal small win state of (c) to the start of the normal game state of (e) (start of the next fluctuation) (normal small win digestion time = normal small win digestion time) May be set. That is, irregular small hit digestion time = normal small hit digestion time + α may be set. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of the occurrence of an irregular small win, which is an unintended (not recommended) small win, using the extra time α.

In addition, the normal small hit digestion time is the above-mentioned small hit fanfare time (A6003a, A
6003b), small hit open time (A6906 etc.), small hit remaining ball processing time (A7006 etc.), small hit ending time (A7104, A7107). For example, in the case of an irregular small hit, in the small win end processing (FIGS. 72 and 73), by adding a process of saving the time α in the special game processing timer area, an extra time is added to the normal small win digestion time. An irregular small hit digestion time can be obtained by adding a long time α. In addition, the normal small hit digestion time is the time during the small win state, but the extra time α is the time from after the end of the small win state to the start of the next variation.

In addition, the game control device 100 transmits information (a signal regarding the start of the small win) indicating that the small win itself has occurred to the external information terminal 71 when the irregular small win occurs (A60
04a, A6004b), during the extra time α, two types of information, ie, information indicating that a small win has occurred and information indicating that the small win is irregular, are transmitted to the external information terminal 71. good. For example, in the small hit end process (FIGS. 72 and 73), by executing the process of saving the above two types of information in the external information output data area, extra time α
, the two types of information can be transmitted to the external information terminal 71 . In this way, information indicating that the small win is irregular, that is, the irregular small win is sent to the external device (such as a data display device and a hall computer provided in the game machine 10) via the external information terminal 71. By transmitting information indicating the occurrence, it is possible to notify that an irregular small win, which is a small win, has occurred. It should be noted that only information indicating that the small win is irregular may be transmitted to the external information terminal 71 during the extra time α.

In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 reservation number "1", and the special figure 2 reservation number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 reservation number "2". In addition, since the small win state is over and the normal game state is entered, a left-hand hitting display 656 for recommending the player to hit left-hand is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

The following (i) is the same state as (i) and (f) except for the number of pending.

After that, in (C), the result of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, becomes a big hit result, and the big hit pattern (big hit stop pattern) "3, 3, 3" is derived, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. It is displayed as a large pattern. The jackpot here is a normal jackpot. Also, corresponding to the second display mode (sub-display) of the special figure 1 variable display game, the big hit symbol "3, 3, 3" is displayed small in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen.

In addition, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, becomes a big hit result, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the secondary variation display game, is a losing result, that is, the losing pattern "9, 2, 6 " is forcibly stopped (forced stop).

In addition, in (J), a big win fanfare effect is executed in the central portion of the display screen as a big win effect. As part of the jackpot fanfare production, the character display "Congratulations on the jackpot!
! ”, a blessing effect is executed to congratulate and notify the occurrence of a big hit. In addition, although it was stated that a blessing effect in which a character appears and congratulates may be executed in the case of a normal small win (c), a blessing effect in which a character appears and congratulates a big win may It may be executed in the same manner as in the winning case (c) or in a different manner. If the modes are different, the distinction between the big win and the small win becomes clear, and if the modes are the same, there is a commonality in the blessing effects, which improves the interest of the game.

Then, since it is a big hit state, a right-handed display 657 is displayed in order to recommend the player to hit right-handed.
is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen in a large form (first form, maximum form), and a right-handed display 658 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen in a small form different from the right-handed display 657 (second form). aspect, minimum aspect).

Also, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "
The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 .

Subsequently, in (S), a big win round effect is executed in the central portion of the display screen as a big win effect.

In addition, the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) of (c) (ko) in FIG. 151A described above
In the normal small hit or normal big hit, the secondary variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is lost in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen ("1, 6, 7", "9, 2, 6 " is forcibly stopped (forced stop).However, in the case of a normal small win or a normal jackpot in the main variable display game, the secondary variable display game is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the sub-variation display game may be postponed, but the sub-variation display game in the variation display area 615 may be seemingly continued due to shaking fluctuation or the like during the minor win state or the big win state. It should be noted that, after the small hit state, measurement of the variable time by the timer is restarted for the secondary variable display game.

Similarly, in the irregular small hit of the sub-variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) of (g) in FIG. , The main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is off the pattern ("1, 5,
6") is forcibly stopped (forced stop). However, the main variable display game may be interrupted by interrupting measurement of the variable time by the timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the main variation display game is postponed, but the main variation display game in the variation display areas 610 and 613 may be seemingly continued due to shaking variation or the like during the minor winning state. It should be noted that after the small hit state, measurement of the variation time by the timer is restarted for the main variation display game.

As the first display mode of the main variation display game during interruption (during the minor winning state of the secondary variation display game) in the variation display area 610, there is a mode in which the game is shaken (temporarily stopped) with large symbols, or Although there is a mode in which rotational fluctuation is performed, scrolling (fluctuation in the vertical direction of the display screen) before interruption may be continued even during interruption. As a second display mode of the main variation display game during suspension (during the minor winning state of the secondary variation display game) in the variation display area 613, there is a mode in which the small symbols swing and rotate. The previous mode of scrolling may be continued even during the interruption.

In addition, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state of FIG. 116, even if normal small hits and irregular small hits occur, it is basically the same as in FIGS. 151A and 151B, and the main fluctuation display The special figure 1 variable display game, which is a game, is displayed in two modes, the first display mode (main display) of the variable display area 610 and the second display mode (sub display) of the variable display area 613 .
In the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a secondary variable display game, the variable display area 615 at the end of the display screen
is displayed. In addition, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, since the normal electric winning opening of the normal variable winning device 33 is the main starting area, the ball to the first starting winning opening 36 (secondary starting area) Even if the special figure 1 variable display game executed based on is a small win, it becomes an irregular small win, but in that case, the small win performance (including the blessing performance) is not executed. For example, (C) (
If the case of d) is assumed to be such an irregular small hit instead of a normal small win, the character display ``Tiger mode entry'' ``Congratulations on the small win'' ``Tiger mode'' and the large right-handed display 657 are not displayed. , the small winning symbol "7, 6, 7" in the main display may not be displayed.

[Another example of irregular small hit 1]
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing another example 1 of the irregular small hit.

Figure 152 (T) is a continuation of Figure 151A (K) and is a special figure 1
The result of the variable display game is a lost result, and the lost symbols "8, 4, 3" are displayed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen. Also, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the stop symbols "8, 4, 3" of the special figure 1 variable display game are displayed small. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “×” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.
”, and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. The second predetermined image 676 “o” may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

Subsequently, (h) is the same as (a) in FIG. 151A except for the number of reservations. Special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "1", special figure 2 pending number display 660
Display the current special figure 2 pending number "3".

After that, in (T), the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is a lost result, and the lost symbols "2, 5, 1" are displayed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen. It is Also, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the stop symbol "2, 5, 1" of the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed small. Others are the same as (T).

Next, (Te) is the same as (H) except for the number of reservations. Special figure 1 pending number display 65
0 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "0", special figure 2 pending number display 660 is the current special figure 2
Display the pending number "3".

After that, in (g), an irregular small hit occurs as in (g) in FIG. 151B.
(g) is the same as (g) except for the number of reservations.

Next, in (na), the small winning state of the irregular small winning ends and the normal game state starts. However, since the number of the current special figure 1 pending is "0", unlike (h) in FIG.
It does not start with both 3, and keeps the state in which the lost symbols "1, 5, 6" are stopped and displayed at the center and left end of the display screen. However, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a secondary variable display game, starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen.

In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 reservation number "0", and the special figure 2 reservation number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 reservation number "2". In addition, since the small win state is over and the normal game state is entered, a left-hand hitting display 656 for recommending the player to hit left-hand is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

151, the game control device 100 moves from the start of the irregular small hit state of (g) in FIG. The time (irregular small hit digestion time) is the time from the start of the normal small hit state in FIG. It may be set longer than hit digestion time, normal small hit digestion time). That is, irregular small hit digestion time = normal small hit digestion time + α may be set. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of the occurrence of an irregular small win, which is an unintended (not recommended) small win, using the extra time α.

[Another example of irregular small hit 2]
FIG. 153 is a diagram showing another example 2 of the irregular small hit. Another example 2 of the irregular small hit corresponds to replacing (K) in FIG. 151B with (Key-1) to (Key-4) in FIG.

(Key-1) in FIG. 153 is the same as (K) in FIG. 7” is derived and displayed in a small size in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen. On the other hand, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game (secondary variation display game) is a small hit result, so that the special figure 1 variation display game (main variation display game) is performed in the variation display area 613 at the left end of the display screen. The game is forcibly stopped (forced stop) at the result of losing (specific result), that is, the small losing symbols "1, 5, 6" in the sub-display (second display mode). In addition, in the variable display area 610 in the central part of the display screen, the result (specific result) of the special figure 1 variable display game, that is, the large lost symbols "1, 5, 6" in the main display (first display mode) is not displayed.

In this way, when the result of the secondary variation display game is an irregular small hit resulting in a small winning result, the main variation display game is terminated, the main variation display game is set as the losing result, and the losing result is the first display mode. It is not displayed in the (large mode), but is displayed on the display screen in the second display mode (small mode). Therefore, in the case of an irregular small hit, there is no misrecognition as if the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) displayed large in the main display resulted in a small win.

Note that while the main variation display game is frequently executed, the secondary variation display game is rarely executed and fluctuates for a long time, so that small wins are rare. Since it is difficult to discern the difference between the small winning symbols and the winning symbols, it is easy to misunderstand that the main variation display game has resulted in a small winning despite the winning symbols. Therefore, in the case of an irregular small win, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly think that the main variation display game, which has been displayed in a large and conspicuous manner, has resulted in a small win.

It should be noted that the main variable display game may be interrupted by interrupting measurement of the variable time by the timer due to the irregular small hit, but during the interruption in the variable display area 613 (sub-variable display game small win state) Mode (second display mode) of the main fluctuation display game in (middle) includes a mode of swinging and fluctuating (temporary stop) with small symbols, a mode of rotating with small symbols, and scrolling that is apparently the same as before interruption. There are aspects.

Next, (key-2) is a display screen when the irregular small winning state ends and the normal game state starts. A hit left display 656 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen to encourage the player to hit left. Fusuma-like concealment images 651a and 651a capable of concealing other images are also shown.
It appears while moving so that 1b closes.

In addition, while the pending shift is executed, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "1", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 is the current special figure 2 pending Display the number "2". In addition, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variation display game being performed. The symbol "○" indicates that

The small winning symbols "7, 6, 7" at the right end of the display screen and the small missing symbols "1, 5, 6" at the left end of the display screen are given priority over the concealment images 651a and 651b in the upper layer (front side). )
, and the hidden images 651a and 651b are the small winning symbols “7, 6, 7” and the missing symbols “
1, 5, 6" are not hidden, but may be hidden. In addition, hidden images 651a, 6
51b is a special figure 1 reserved display 620a, a reserved digestion area 640 (including a variable reserved display), a special figure 1 reserved number display 650, a special figure 2 reserved number display 660, a first predetermined image 675, a second predetermined image 67
6 are not hidden, but any one or more of them may be hidden.

Subsequently, immediately after (key-3), the hidden images 651a and 651b in the form of fusuma are completely closed,
Two concealment images 651a, 651b touch each other. Also, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is variable in the sub-display (second display mode). In the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a secondary variable display game, is changing in a small manner.

It should be noted that the fusuma hidden images 651a and 651b are preferentially displayed in the upper layer (front side), and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the main display is displayed in the lower layer (back side), so the fusuma Concealment images 651a and 651b in the form conceal the special figure 1 variable display game of the main display (concealment effect). Therefore, in the variable display area 610 in the central portion of the display screen, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is not displayed in the main display (first display mode).
In addition, since it is not conspicuous, it is not necessary to hide the special figure 1 variation display game (sub display) in the variation display area 613 at the left end and the special figure 2 variation display game in the variation display area 615 at the right end.

Subsequently, immediately after (key-4), the fusuma-shaped concealment images 651a and 651b are displayed with a gap between them, and the special figure 1 variable display of the main display from the gap between the two concealment images 651a and 651b. A portion of the game is displayed and visible. As a part of the special figure 1 variable display game, the variable display of the middle symbol "5" is displayed among the lost symbols "1, 5, 6" that started the variation.

After that, FIG. 153(h) is the same as FIG.
51a, 651b are completely opened and erased. Then, all of the special figure 1 variable display game of the main display is displayed and can be visually recognized.

It should be noted that if the variation starts suddenly from (key 1) like (h), the symbols "1, 5, 6" that are out of the main display suddenly appear and the variation starts, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. . However, in (key-2) to (key-4) of FIG. 153, after the end of the small hit state due to the irregular small hit, the hidden images 651a and 651b in the form of fusuma are the special figures 1 of the main display immediately after the start
By executing the concealment performance for concealing the variable display game, the player's sense of discomfort is reduced.

In (key-1), a predetermined image may be displayed before the fusuma-like concealment images 651a and 651b are displayed. For example, the predetermined image may be a character image (for example, "Irregular!") that informs that it is an irregular small hit, or a normal game (special figure fluctuation display game)
A character image (for example, "Please wait a minute!") may be displayed to notify that the game will stop, that is, that the progress of the normal game will be delayed due to the occurrence of a small hit. Even in this way, the discomfort felt by the player can be reduced.

[Another example 3 of irregular small hit (switching effect 1)]
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing another example 3 (switching effect 1) of the irregular small hit. Another example 3 of the irregular small hit is (key-1) to (key-4) in FIG. 153 (key-a) in FIG.
to (key-d).

(Key-a) in FIG. 154 is the same as (Key-1) in FIG. 151B and (Key-1) in FIG. As (first display mode), the small hit symbols "7, 6, 7" of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (subordinate fluctuation display game) are displayed in a large size. Also, in addition to the right-handed display 658 in a small mode (second mode) in the lower right corner of the display screen, it corresponds to the small winning pattern "7, 6, 7" displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen. Then, a right hitting display 657 in a large mode (first mode, maximum mode) is displayed at the upper right of the display screen.

Next, (key-b) is the same as (key-2) in FIG. 153, but unlike (key-2),
The large small winning patterns "7, 6, 7" of the main display (first display mode) are hidden by the fusuma-shaped concealment images 651a and 651b that appear while moving to close.

Subsequently, (key-c) immediately after (key-c) is the same as (key-3) in FIG. Winning pattern "
7, 6, 7" is completely hidden.

Subsequently, immediately after (key-d), the fusuma-shaped concealment images 651a and 651b are displayed with a gap between them, and the special figure 1 variable display of the main display from the gap between the two concealment images 651a and 651b. A portion of the game is displayed and visible. Here, as part of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the main display, out of the symbols "1, 5, 6" that started fluctuation,
A variable display of medium symbol "5" is displayed.

It should be noted that (key-a) suddenly starts to fluctuate like (h), suddenly, the big small hit pattern "7, 6, 7" of the main display of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (secondary fluctuation display game) , the main display of the special figure 1 variation display game (main variation display game) changes to the missing symbols "1, 5, 6" and variation starts, so that the player feels uncomfortable. However, in (key-b) to (key-d) in FIG. 154, after the end of the small hit state due to the irregular small hit, the hidden images 651a and 651b in the form of fusuma are the special figure 1 fluctuation of the main display immediately after the start By executing the concealment performance for concealing the displayed game, the player's sense of discomfort is reduced.

It should be noted that this concealment effect is the missing pattern "1, 5, 6" as the missing result (specific result) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (secondary fluctuation display game ) as a small hit result (first special result) is switched and displayed on the display screen (switching effect 1). In the case of an irregular small hit, the main fluctuation display game can be started by switching from the small win result of the sub-variation display game to the losing result of the main fluctuation display game by switching performance, so that the continuity of the display and the sense of incompatibility are reduced. Become.

[Another example 4 of irregular small hit (switching effect 2)]
FIG. 155 is a diagram showing another example 4 (switching effect 2) of the irregular small hit. Another example 4 of the irregular small hit corresponds to replacing (h) in FIG. 151B with (h-1) to (h-5) in FIG.

In (g) of FIG. 155, a small hit state occurs due to an irregular small hit.

In (C-1) of FIG. 155, the first switching effect is executed immediately after the occurrence of the small hit state.
In the first switching effect, the main display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) "1, 5, 6" is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (secondary fluctuation display game). 7.
6, 7” to display the main display.

In (C-1), the effect control device 300 includes the special figure 1 reserved display 620a and its reserved digestion area 640, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) lost pattern 655a "1,
5, 6” are attached to one side face 652a of a rectangular parallelepiped object, which is a 3D object (stereoscopic object), and displayed on the display screen in perspective. again,
The production control device 300 displays the special figure 2 reserved display 630a, its reserved digestion area 640, and the small hit pattern 655b "7, 6, 7" of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (subordinate fluctuation display game) on the side of the rectangular parallelepiped object. It is attached to the side surface 652b on the right side of 652a so as to be attached and displayed on the display screen in perspective. The top and bottom sides of the cuboid of a cuboid object are squares, and the four sides are the same rectangle. Also, a cuboid object is drawn by two-point perspective drawing as a perspective method.

Then, the effect control device 300 displays the rectangular parallelepiped object so as to rotate in the positive direction around the vertical center axis of the rectangular parallelepiped. At first, the missing pattern 655a "1, 5, 6
Only the side 652a of the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed so that only "" can be visually recognized, but the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed to rotate so that the side 652a moves to the far left side (rotation in the positive direction). When the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed to rotate, the small winning pattern 655b "7, 6, 7" on the side 652b is displayed, and finally, the small winning pattern 655b "7" is displayed.
, 6, 7" are visible, only side 652b is displayed. In this way, by the first switching effect, the rotating display of the 3D object is used to
, 5, 6” is switched to the small winning symbol 655b “7, 6, 7”.

It should be noted that the first switching effect is, like (C-1), the decorative pattern is in a stopped state (derivation of the stopped losing pattern "1, 5, 6" and the stopped small winning pattern "7, 6, 7" It does not have to be executed in the state of being executed), and may be executed during the fluctuation just before the decoration pattern stops. In this case, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (secondary fluctuation display game) during fluctuation is executed within the side 652a and the side 652b of the rectangular parallelepiped object, respectively. As the side 652a and the side 652b move due to the rotation of the cuboid object, the display position of the variable display (variable display area) also moves.

In addition, in the right-handed state (small win state) in which right-handed hitting is recommended in (C-1), if the player hits left-handed, the right-handed hit display 657 that returns the hitting method to right-handed is a large aspect (second 1) is displayed on the display screen. In that case, the right-handed display 657 may be displayed by attaching it to the surface (side surfaces 652a, 652b) of the rectangular parallelepiped object, or may be displayed outside the side surfaces 652a, 652b regardless of the rectangular parallelepiped object. may be displayed in Right-handed indication 657 is partly
A, 652b may be displayed outside the display areas of the sides 652a, 652b, and another portion may be displayed overlapping the display areas of the sides 652a, 652b so as to straddle the display areas of the sides 652a, 652b.

In addition, as described above, due to the irregular small hit, the main variation display game is interrupted by interrupting the measurement (timekeeping) of the variation time by the timer (derivation of the result of the main variation display game is postponed). However, the interrupted main variation display game may be displayed in a specific mode, such as pasted on the side surface 652a. Specific modes of the main variation display game include a mode in which swing variation (temporary stop) is performed within the side 652a, and a mode in which the player moves within the side 652a by linear or curved scrolling within the side 652a. In addition, after the small hit state, the timer restarts the measurement of the fluctuation time (timekeeping) for the main fluctuation display game,
The main variation display game resumes.

Subsequently, in (C-2), in the small hit state after the end of the first switching effect, the small hit pattern “7, 6, 7” of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (secondary fluctuation display game) is the main display ( displayed in the first display mode). Also, in the second display unit 630, the special figure 2 hold display 630a (special figure 2 start memory display) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) that is the execution right of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is 3 are displayed. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 . Also, a right hitting display 657 and a right hitting display 658 are displayed.

After that, in (C-3), when the variation of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is about to start in the normal game state immediately after the end of the small win state, a right hitting display 657
Then, the right-handed display 658 disappears and the left-handed display 656 is displayed.

Subsequently, in (C-4), while the variation of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is started, the second switching effect is executed. In the second switching effect, the small hit pattern "7, 6, 7" of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (secondary fluctuation display game) is replaced by the main display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game). 1, 5, 6” to display the main display. It should be noted that it is also possible to perform the second switching effect during the small winning state instead of the normal game state after the small winning state ends.

In the second switching effect, the effect control device 300 displays the rectangular parallelepiped object so as to rotate in the direction opposite to that of the first switching effect around the vertical center axis of the rectangular parallelepiped. At first, only the side 652b of the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed so that only the small winning symbol "7, 6, 7" can be visually recognized, but the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed so that the side 652b moves to the far right side. (reverse rotation). When the cuboid object is displayed so as to rotate, the missing pattern 655a "1, 5, 6" on the side 652a is displayed, and finally, only the missing pattern 655a "1, 5, 6" is visible. , only side 652a is displayed. Thus, by the second switching effect, the rotating display of the 3D object is used to switch the small winning pattern 655b "7, 6, 7" to the losing pattern 655a "1, 5, 6".

It should be noted that the second switching effect does not need to be executed during the variation of the decorative symbols as in (C-4), and the stopped state of the decorative symbols before the start of the variation (lost symbols during stop "1, 5, 6 ” and the stopped small winning pattern “7, 6, 7” derived state)). In this case, the stop display (stop pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game (main variation display game) and the special figure 2 variation display game (secondary variation display game) are respectively the side 652a and the side 65 by rotating the cuboid object.
The display position moves as 2b moves.

In addition, when the player hits right in the left-handed state (normal game state) where left-handed hitting is recommended in (C-4), in addition to the left-handed display 656, the left-handed hitting is returned to the left-handed state. A hit indication is displayed on the display screen in a large format. For example, a large version of a left-handed display is a right-handed display 657
It is also possible to change the character of , to "left-handed" and reverse the direction of the arrow. In that case, the left-handed display is
It may be displayed by attaching it to the surface (side surfaces 652a, 652b) of the rectangular parallelepiped object, or may be displayed on the display screen outside the side surfaces 652a, 652b independently of the rectangular parallelepiped object. When displayed off the sides 652a, 652b, the left-handed display is displayed partly outside the viewing area of the sides 652a, 652b and partly outside the viewing area of the sides 652a, 652b.
It may be displayed overlapping the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b so as to straddle the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b.

In addition, the effect control device 300 adds the special figure 1 reserved display 620a and its reserved digestion area 640 to the side 652a, and adds the special figure 2 reserved display 630a and its reserved digestion area 640 to the side 652
It is added to b and displayed on the display screen by the perspective method (two-point perspective method).

After that, in (Chu 5), the cuboid object disappears, and as in (H), the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes the main variable display game is displayed in the variable display area 6 by the main display and sub display.
10 and the variable display area 613 .

As described above, in the case of an irregular small hit, by the first switching effect, in the main display, after deriving the losing result of the main variation display game, the small winning result (first special result) of the secondary variation display game is displayed. It can be displayed by switching. Therefore, the player is not misunderstood as if the main variation display game, which is displayed large and conspicuously, has resulted in a small hit. In addition, by the second switching effect, in the main display, it is possible to switch from the small hit result of the secondary fluctuation display game to the losing result of the main fluctuation display game, and the main fluctuation display game can be started, so that the small win state (g) and the normal game There is continuity in the display with the state (Chu 5), and the sense of incongruity is reduced.

As mentioned above, when moving from (C-3) to (C-4), the next variation has already started, but not after the start of the next variation, but during the small hit digestion time (here Then, the second switching effect may be executed during the above-mentioned irregular small hit digestion time. By doing so, the progress of the game becomes smooth. In addition, by doing so, the second switching performance provides a performance slightly different from the normal small winning state (normal small winning state), thereby making it easier to recognize that it is an irregular small winning, and in the performance control device 300. It leads to a reduction in the load of image processing (the image processing of the second switching effect is lighter for the stopped decorative pattern than for the fluctuating decorative pattern).
.

In addition, in (C-1) and (C-4), the side faces 652a and 652a, which are the partitioned display areas,
When the emphasis effect for emphasizing 52b is executed, the side faces 652a and 652b, which are visually recognizable as if they are tilted to the back side due to the perspective, become easier to understand. Sides 652a, 652b
, the outlines of the sides 652a, 652b can be displayed in a special color (gold).
Displaying an effect image around the

In addition, in (C-1) and (C-4), by displaying a predetermined image (eg, an arrow, a ball, etc.) on the display screen or operating a movable accessory, the side 652a which is a partitioned display area , 65
You may perform the effect|action production|presentation which makes a predetermined image and a character act on special figure 1 reservation display 620a and special figure 2 reservation display 630a of 2b. And, special figure 1 reserved display 620a and special figure 2 reserved display 6
In response to the action effect for 30a, a pending change effect may be executed in which the mode (color, etc.) of the pending display of the target of the effect effect changes from the normal mode. The hold change effect (hold change notice) here may be performed after the hold occurs, not when the hold occurs. Note that the predetermined image may be displayed in the side surfaces 652a and 652b, which are the partitioned display areas (partitioned areas), or the side surface 65
2a and 652b, or a part of the side faces 652a and 652b.
It may be displayed within the partitioned area of 2b and another part may be displayed outside the partitioned area.

Also, during the first switching production of (K-1), if the mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 620a changes due to the holding change production (holding change notice), even in the second switching production of (K-4), the change The special figure 1 reservation display 620a of the mode is displayed. That is, from (C-1) to (C-4), the once changed special figure 1 reserved display 620a is maintained in the changed mode. Similarly,
Even if the mode of the special figure 2 reserved display 630a in (K-1) changes from the normal mode, (
From Ku-1) to (K-4), the changed mode of the special figure 2 pending display 630a once changed is maintained. As described above, the once-changed pending display never returns to the original normal state before the change, so that the player does not misunderstand that the pending change ranks down, and the interest in the game does not decrease.

It should be noted that, during the first switching production of (K-1), if the state of the special figure 1 reservation display 620a changes due to the holding change production (holding change notice), the second switching production of (K-4) starts Until or at the start of the second switching effect, it is also possible to return the special figure 1 reservation display 620a to the normal mode. In this configuration, in particular, when the special figure 2 pending display 630a is changed to a big hit, the special figure 1 pending display 620a is a normal mode in the second switching effect of (K-4). It becomes easier to draw the player's attention to the FIG. 2 pending display 630a.

[Screen transition 2]
Figures 156A and 156B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in relation to the third embodiment. It shows a case where a small hit and an irregular small hit occur.

(a) to (ka) of FIG. 156A correspond to (a) to (f) of FIG.
(Sa) corresponds to (K) to (Sa) in FIG. 151B, but in the small hit RUSH state, the main variation display game becomes the special figure 2 variation display game, and the secondary variation display game becomes the special figure 1 variation display game. , It is reversed from the normal game state.

Therefore, in (a) to (sa) of FIG. 156, unlike (a) to (sa) of FIG. 151,
The main display of the main variation display game is not the special figure 1 variation display game, but the special figure 2 variation display game, and not the special figure 1 reservation display 620a and its reservation digestion area 640, but the special figure 2 reservation display 630a and its reservation. A digestion region 640 is displayed on the display screen (second display portion 630). Also, in (a) ~ (sa) of Figure 156, the number of reservations displayed in the special figure 1 pending number display 650 and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 are mutually from (a) ~ (sa) of Figure 151 have been replaced.

Also, in (a) to (sa) of FIG. 156, a right-handed display 658 is always displayed through the small hit RUSH state, the small hit state, and the big hit state.

[Modification of the third embodiment]
In this modification, unlike the above, not only the irregular small hit, but also the small hit production is not executed even in the case of the normal small hit that occurs from the normal game state, and the blessing production performed as part of the small hit production is also performed. Not executed.

In the winning system command process of FIG. 157, step B21 of the winning system command process of FIG.
02, B2106, B2110, B2114 are steps B2102a, B2106a,
Replaced by B2110a and B2114a. and step B2102a, B
In 2106a, B2110a, and B2114a, it is determined whether or not it is an irregular small hit or a small hit from the normal game state, and when the judgment is "Y", fanfare effect setting processing (B2103), round effect The setting process (B2107), the interval effect setting process (B2111), and the ending effect setting process (B2115) are not executed.

FIG. 158A is a table exemplifying the presence/absence of a small winning effect and a big winning effect by the winning system command process with respect to the normal game state (left-handed state). Unlike FIG. 147A, even if the result of the main variation display game is a small hit result in the first period (in the case of a normal small hit), in the second period after the first period, the small hit effect (including the blessing effect) is not executed.

On the other hand, in the small hit RUSH state (right-handed state) of FIG. 158B, as in FIG. In the case of winning), a small winning effect is executed in the second period after the first period.

In FIGS. 158A and 158B, it is the same as in FIGS. 147A and 147B that the small winning effect is not executed in the case of the irregular small winning.

FIG. 159 is a screen transition diagram according to this modification, in which only (c) and (d) in FIG. 151A are replaced with (c-1). In (C-1), a normal small hit (a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game) is generated from the normal game state, but a small win effect such as a small win fanfare effect or a small win middle effect is not executed. In (C-1), during the small-hit state, the small-hit symbol "7, 6, 7" of the special figure 1 variation display game is displayed large in the first display mode (main display) in the center of the display screen. There is only Note that the large right-handed display 657 may or may not be displayed.

As described above, in the modified example, the result of the main variation display game becomes a small hit result in the small hit RUSH state (second game state), so that when a small hit state occurs from the small hit RUSH state, a blessing effect to run. On the other hand, in the normal game state (first game state), the result of the main variation display game is a small win result, and when a small win state occurs from the normal game state, no blessing effect is executed.

Thus, by not executing the blessing performance when the small winning state occurs from the normal game state, the player can be impressed with the blessing performance when the small winning state occurs from the small winning RUSH state. Depending on the state, you can add sharpness to the production. In particular, since the small hit RUSH state is a state in which the player is more profitable than the normal game state, the small hit RU
It can be emphasized that the SH state is a profitable gaming state for the player.

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening 36
) or the display device 41 displays a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the second start area (for example, the second start winning port 37).
(a production control device 300) that can be displayed in the display, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state (for example, a small win state, a big win state) that is advantageous to the player can be generated. is. Then, in the gaming machine 10, it is recommended to enter the game ball into the first starting area, the first starting area becomes the main area (main starting area), and the second starting area becomes the secondary area (secondary starting area). The first gaming state (for example, normal gaming state, left-handed state) and the entry of the game ball to the second start area are recommended, the second start area becomes the main area, and the first start area is It is possible to generate a second game state (for example, a small hit RUSH state, a right-handed state) that becomes a secondary area. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and can perform the secondary variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the sub area. It is viable. Furthermore, the effect control means (effect control device 300), when the result of the main variation display game becomes the first special result (for example, small hit result), the first special game state (for example, small hit state) occurs In addition, when the first special game state occurs due to the result of the secondary variable display game becoming the first special result, while executing the blessing effect of blessing and notifying the occurrence of the first special game state. , does not execute the blessing effect of blessing and announcing the occurrence of the first special game state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the result of the main variation display game is the first special result (
For example, only in the case of a normal small win), a blessing effect is executed to congratulate and notify the occurrence of the first special game state (for example, a small win state). Therefore, the player enjoys the game in the original way of enjoying (playing), and the interest in the game is improved. Note that the result of the secondary variable display game is the first
When a blessing effect is executed in the case of a special result (for example, in the case of an irregular small win), the player tries to generate a large number of secondary variable display games, aiming at the start area where the entry of the game ball is not recommended. Since the game ball is hit, it becomes impossible to enjoy the game in the original way of enjoying, and an error notice of the hitting method occurs frequently.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), when the result of the secondary variable display game becomes the first special result and the first special game state occurs (for example, irregular small winning case), the result of the main variation display game is a first special result (for example, a small hit result) and a second special result (for example, a big hit result) different from the first special result (for example, common with the case of loss) is displayed on the display device 41.

Therefore, even if the first special game state is generated by the secondary variable display game (for example, in the case of an irregular small hit), the result of the main variable display game is a loss result other than the special result (including chance eye symbols and default symbols). ) and the display of common content (for example, special figure 1
Reservation display 620a, special figure 1 reservation number display 650, special figure 2 reservation number display 660, etc.) can be displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, the first special game state ((for example,
Even if a small win state due to an irregular small win occurs, the player sees the same display on the display device 41 as the result of losing the main variation display game frequently displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Confusion in the first special game state due to the sudden occurrence of the secondary variable display game is reduced.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means, when the result of the main variation display game becomes the first special result and the first special game state (for example, the small win state due to the normal small win) occurs, When the first special game state occurs from the second game state (for example, small win RUSH state), the blessing performance is executed, but the first special game state occurs from the first game state (for example, normal game state). If you do, do not perform the blessing production.

Therefore, by not executing the blessing effect when the first special game state (for example, small hit state) occurs from the first game state (for example, normal game state), from the second game state (for example, small hit RUSH state) A player can be impressed with a blessing performance when a first special game state (for example, a small winning state) occurs, and the performance can be sharpened according to the game state. In particular, when the second game state is more profitable to the player than the first game state, it can be emphasized that the second game state is a profitable game state to the player.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can put both the main variation display game and the sub-variation display game into a state of being executed. Therefore, the time for completing the variable display game is increased and the time efficiency is improved. If the slave variation display game (or the master variation display game) is started after the completion of the master variation display game (or the slave variation display game), the time required to complete the variation display game increases, resulting in time efficiency. Deteriorate.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means makes the main variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area rather than the sub-variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the secondary area. , and both the primary variation display game and the secondary variation display game can be in a state of being executed, and the result of the secondary variation display game is the first special result (for example, In the case of a regular small hit), the main variation display game is ended and the main variation display game is used as the specified result, and the specified result (for example, losing result) is the first special result (for example, small win result) of the secondary variation display game. display larger than

Therefore, when the result of the secondary variation display game is the first special result, the primary variation display game is ended and the specific result (for example, the losing result) of the main variation display game is replaced with the first special result of the secondary variation display game ( For example, if the result is displayed larger than the small hit result), it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the main variation display game has resulted in the first special result. Although the main variation display game is frequently executed, if the first special result (for example, the small win result) that suddenly occurs in the infrequently executed secondary variation display game is conspicuously displayed, it is displayed prominently. The player may mistakenly think that the primary variable display game that was playing has become the first special outcome.

According to the third embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a start memory means capable of storing a start memory that is the right to execute the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area. The effect control means displays the starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory that is the right to execute the main variable display game when the result of the secondary variable display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of an irregular small win). It can be displayed on device 41 .

Therefore, even when the result of the secondary variation display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the starting memory display for the main variation display game can be continuously displayed on the display device. Therefore, in response to the result of the sub-variation display game becoming the first special result (for example, the result of a small hit), it is possible to prevent confusion by displaying the starting memory display for the sub-variation display game on the display device 41.例文帳に追加can.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means makes the second special result (for example, big win result) different from the first special result (for example, small win result) the result of the main variation display game or the sub-variation display game. When the second special game state (for example, a big hit state) occurs, a display (for example, right-handed display 657) for recommending the player to enter the game ball into the second start area is provided in the first mode (
for example, in a large mode), and the result of the secondary variable display game becomes the first special result, so that the first
When a special game state occurs (for example, in the case of an irregular small hit), a display (for example, right-handed display 658) for recommending the player to enter the game ball into the second start area is displayed as the first is displayed in a second mode (for example, a smaller mode) different from the mode of .

Therefore, when the result of the sub-variation display game becomes the first special result and the first special game state (for example, the small win state due to the irregular small win) occurs, the second special game state (for example, the big win state) is generated. ) in a mode (for example, a small mode) that is less conspicuous than the first mode (eg, a large mode) in ), a display for recommending the player to enter the game ball into the second start area (for example, a right-handed display) can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the main variation display game displayed in a large size has resulted in the first special result (for example, a small winning result).

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can execute the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and the sub-variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the secondary area. The game can be executed, both the primary variation display game and the secondary variation display game can be in a state of being executed, and the result of the secondary variation display game is the first special result (for example, the small winning result). In this case, the main variation display game is ended and the main variation display game is set as a specified result (for example, a losing result), and the specified result of the main variation display game and the first special result of the secondary variation display game are displayed on the display device. , a switching effect for switching and displaying is executed.

Therefore, when the result of the secondary variation display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of an irregular small hit), the switching effect is used to derive the specific result of the primary variation display game (for example, the result of losing). The display can be switched to the first special result (for example, small hit result) of the variable display game. Therefore, the player is not misunderstood as if the first special result (for example, a small hit result) was obtained in the main variation display game that is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner. In addition, by the switching effect, the first special result (for example, small hit result) of the secondary fluctuation display game can be switched to the specific result (for example, losing result) of the main fluctuation display game, and the main fluctuation display game can be started, so that the display is continuous. and less discomfort.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can execute the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and the secondary variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the sub area. can be executed, both the primary variation display game and the secondary variation display game can be in a state of being executed, and when the result of the secondary variation display game is the first special result, the primary variation display The game is interrupted to set the main variable display game to a specific mode, and a switching performance is executed to switch and display the specific mode of the primary variable display game and the first special result of the secondary variable display game on the display device.

Therefore, when the result of the secondary variation display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of an irregular small hit), the switching effect interrupts the main variation display game to perform the main variation display game in a specific mode (for example, , shaking fluctuation, etc.) can be switched to the first special result of the sub-variation display game (for example, a small hit result). Therefore, the player is not misunderstood as if the first special result (for example, a small hit result) was obtained in the main variation display game that is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner. Further, by the switching effect, switching from the first special result (for example, small hit result) of the secondary variable display game to the specific mode of the main variable display game,
Since the main variable display game can be started, there is continuity in the display and the sense of incompatibility is reduced.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means divides the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area into the first display mode (for example, large display mode) and the second display mode (for example, small display mode). can be displayed on the display device 41 in two modes. Further, the effect control means is capable of displaying, on the display device, a sub-variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the sub-area, and the main variation-display game and the sub-variation display game are both being executed. state. When the result of the secondary variation display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the main variation display game is ended, the main variation display game is set as a specific result (for example, a losing result), and the specific result is used as the first special result. It is not displayed in the first display mode, but is displayed on the display device 41 in the second display mode.

Therefore, when the result of the secondary variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result),
The main variation display game is ended, and the specified result (eg, losing result) of the main variation display game is displayed only in the second display mode (eg, small display mode), and is not displayed in the first display mode (eg, large display mode). . Therefore, the player is not misunderstood as if the main variation display game displayed in the first display mode resulted in the first special result (for example, a small hit result). again,
When the secondary variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the secondary area can be displayed on the display device 41 in a smaller size than the primary variable display game in the first display mode, the primary variable display is displayed in a large size in the first display mode. To prevent a player from misrecognising that the game has resulted in a first special result (for example, a small winning result).

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means divides the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area into the first display mode (for example, large display mode) and the second display mode (for example, small display mode). can be displayed on the display device 41 in two modes. Further, the effect control means is capable of displaying, on the display device, a sub-variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the sub-area, and the main variation-display game and the sub-variation display game are both being executed. state. When the result of the secondary variation display game is the first special result (for example, the result of the small hit), the main variation display game is interrupted and displayed on the display device 41 in the second display mode without displaying in the first display mode. do.

Therefore, when the result of the secondary variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result),
The main variation display game is interrupted and displayed only in the second display mode (eg small display mode) and not displayed in the first display mode (eg large display mode). Therefore, the player is not misunderstood as if the main variation display game displayed in the first display mode resulted in the first special result (for example, a small hit result). Further, when the secondary variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the secondary area can be displayed on the display device 41 in a smaller size than the primary variable display game in the first display mode, the main variable display game in the first display mode is displayed large. To prevent a player from erroneously recognizing that a variable display game has resulted in a first special result (for example, a small winning result).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of its technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is possible to combine multiple embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

10 game machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 2nd Startup Winning Port (2nd Startup Winning Area)
38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board effect device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Effect control device (sub board)
400 power supply

Claims (2)

A case in which an effect control means capable of displaying a variable display game on a display device is provided based on the entry of a game ball into the first start area or the second start area, and the result of the variable display game is the first special result A first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player can be generated immediately, and a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and different from the first advantageous state is generated when the result of the variable display game is the second special result. In a game machine that can occur ,
It is possible to generate a first game state in which entry of a game ball into the first start area is recommended, and a second game state in which entry of a game ball into the second start area is recommended ,
A first variation display game can be executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first start area, and a second variation display game can be executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second start area. is possible and
The production control means is
A decoration special figure variation display game can be displayed on the display device regardless of whether the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed ,
When one of the first variation display game and the second variation display game is stopped and then the other variation display game is started, the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the one variation display game. From the stop mode of the display game, it is possible to start the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the other variable display game,
When a second special result is obtained in a variable display game executed based on a ball entering one of the first starting area and the second starting area where the ball is recommended to enter, the second advantageous state is achieved. It is possible to perform a blessing production to bless the occurrence,
The second advantageous state occurs when a second special result is obtained in the variable display game executed based on the ball entering the starting area where the ball is not recommended to enter, out of the first starting area and the second starting area. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a congratulatory performance of congratulating a . The production control means is
When executing the first variable display game in the first gaming state, it is possible to display the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the first variable display game,
2. The game according to claim 1, wherein the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the second variation display game can be displayed when the second variation display game is executed in the second game state. machine.

Images